JP7246783B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of pieces of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) are displayed on a display device provided in the game area based on the winning of a game ball in a starting hole provided in the game area (start winning). Up to a predetermined number of starting memories can be stored as execution rights of a variable display game that variably displays . Then, a variable display game is executed based on the stored starting memory, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state is entered in which the special variable winning device is released. In addition, it is possible to display effects of various games on the display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-210310

However, the presentation has become monotonous, and the amusement of the game has not been sufficiently enhanced. An object of the present invention is to improve the amusement of games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed and then results are displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
a game control means for comprehensively controlling the game;
Production control means for controlling production related to the game ;
A movable production means operable under the control of the production control means;
A display means capable of displaying an effect related to the game under the control of the effect control means,
The game control means is
Along with the start of the variable display, sending a variable start command to the effect control means,
Along with the stop of the variable display, a variable stop command is transmitted to the effect control means,
Sending a fanfare command to the effect control means with the start of a state advantageous to the player,
The control information can be held even in a power failure state, and the game can be resumed based on the held control information when the power failure is restored,
The production control means is
Character information can be displayed on the display means as an effect related to the game ,
the character information can be displayed along a non-horizontal line in the first period;
In the second period, the character information can be displayed along a horizontal line,
Further, the effect control means recovers from the power failure after a power failure occurs during execution of the game that becomes the special result, and the initial operation of the movable effect means started upon recovery of the power failure is the fluctuation stop command is completed between the reception of the fanfare command and the reception of the fanfare command, the rendering operation of the movable rendering means can be performed after the reception of the fanfare command,
After a power failure occurs during the execution of the game that does not result in the special result, the power failure is restored, and the initial operation of the movable effect means that is started with the recovery of the power failure is the same as that of the next game after the reception of the fluctuation stop command. It is characterized in that, when the game ends before the reception of the variation start command, the presentation operation of the movable presentation means can be performed after the reception of the variation start command of the next game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the game board. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the rear structural member. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the lower movable accessory unit. FIG. 5 is a front view for explaining the operation of the first lower movable member; FIG. 11 is a front view for explaining the operation of the second lower movable member; FIG. 11 is a front view for explaining the operation of the second lower movable member; It is a front view of an upper movable accessory unit. It is a front view explaining the operation of the upper movable accessory unit. It is a front view explaining the operation of the upper movable accessory unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the central movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of a central movable accessory unit, (a) Front view, (b) Back view. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of a central movable accessory unit, (a) Front view, (b) Back view. It is a front view of a special variable winning device. It is a top view of a special variable winning device. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of an opening-and-closing member, (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the special variable winning device. It is a back view of a front wall member. It is a figure which shows a rear wall member, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) It is a back view. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body viewed from the front side; It is the figure seen from the left explaining operation|movement of an opening-and-closing member unit, (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is a figure which shows an opening-and-closing member, (a) is a top view, (b) is a front view. (a) A front view of the opening/closing member unit, (b) a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA. It is a bottom view explaining operation|movement of an opening-and-closing member unit, (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is a top view explaining the flow-down mode of the game ball in the special variable winning device. It is a figure explaining the flow-down aspect of the game ball in a special variable prize-winning device, and is (a) a top view and (b) a perspective view seen from the right side. It is a diagram for explaining the flow-down mode of game balls in the special variable winning device, and is a perspective view seen from the left. It is a front view explaining the flow-down mode of the game ball in the special variable winning device, (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is a figure explaining the behavior of a game ball at the time of opening an opening-and-closing member. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining checksum calculation processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining initial value random number update processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart explaining input processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining switch read processing; FIG. 4 is a flowchart for explaining output processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining payout command transmission processing; FIG. 6 is a flowchart for explaining random number update processing 1; 9 is a flowchart for explaining random number update processing 2; It is a flow chart for explaining a winning opening switch/state monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining fraud & prize-winning monitoring processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining winning number counter update processing. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flow chart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining hard random number acquisition processing; It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting mouth switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart for explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure usual processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot flag 1 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit determination processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart explaining special figure information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining fluctuation pattern setting processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining allocation processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining 2-byte allocation processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining fluctuation start information setting processing; It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a time reduction variation number update process; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining production mode information check processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1; It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing 1 during small hit fanfare. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining a process transition setting process during the opening of the big winning opening. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during the opening of the big winning opening. It is a flow chart for explaining a large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a large winning opening remaining ball processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 2; It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the big-hit completion|finish setting process 2. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining special figure usual processing shift setting processing 2. (a) is a flow chart for explaining the process during the small hit fanfare, (b) is a flow chart for explaining the process transition setting process during the small hit. It is a flowchart explaining processing during a small hit. It is a flow chart explaining small hit operation transition setting processing. It is a flow chart for explaining small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing. (a) is a flow chart for explaining small hit remaining ball processing, (b) is a flow chart for explaining small hit end processing transition setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining small hit end processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure usual processing shift setting processing 3. 10 is a flowchart for explaining effect command setting processing; It is a flow chart explaining design variation control processing. It is a flow chart explaining normal figure game processing. 9 is a flowchart for explaining gate switch monitoring processing; It is a flow chart explaining general electric winning a prize switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining normal figure usual processing. It is a flow chart explaining normal figure usual processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during normal figure fluctuation. (a) is a flow chart for explaining the processing during normal pattern fluctuation, and (b) is a flow chart for explaining processing transition setting processing during normal pattern display. It is a flow chart explaining processing during normal figure display. It is a flow chart explaining processing transition setting processing in per normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining processing during a normal figure hit. It is a flowchart explaining normal electric operation transition setting processing. (a) is a flow chart for explaining normal electric remaining ball processing, (b) is a flow chart for explaining end processing transition setting processing per normal pattern. (a) is a flowchart for explaining the normal pattern per end process, (b) is a flowchart for explaining the general pattern normal process transition setting process 2. FIG. 9 is a flowchart for explaining segment LED editing processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining magnet fraud monitoring processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining external information editing processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining external information editing processing; It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a starting port signal editing process; FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation in a special game state. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the selection rate of a state suggestion display. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the production control device. 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining single-shot command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining the look-ahead pattern system command processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining look-ahead variation command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining design system command processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining variable command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining change production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining a count effect setting process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare effect setting processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining round production setting processing. 9 is a flowchart for explaining interval effect setting processing; It is a flow chart explaining ending production setting processing. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production|presentation in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production|presentation in a special game state. 4 is a flowchart for explaining initial operation processing; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of information used for initial operation setting; It is a figure which shows the state which each movable production|presentation apparatus operate|moved. It is a figure explaining the operation|movement at the time of power failure recovery. It is a flow chart explaining production operation permission processing. It is a figure explaining the operation|movement at the time of power failure recovery. It is a figure explaining the operation|movement at the time of power failure recovery. It is a figure explaining the operation|movement at the time of power failure recovery. It is a figure explaining the execution aspect of the operation corresponding production|presentation at the time of power failure recovery. It is a figure which shows an example of an initial-operation table. It is a figure which shows an example of an initial-operation table. It is a figure explaining an alternative initial operation. 10 is a flowchart for explaining action substitution processing; It is a figure explaining update of a numerical value display. It is a figure explaining update of a numerical value display. 9 is a flowchart for explaining numerical display update processing; It is a figure explaining update of a numerical value display. It is a figure explaining update of a numerical value display. It is a figure explaining the execution aspect of character production|presentation. 10 is a flowchart for explaining initial operation processing in the first modified example; FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining initial operation processing in a second modified example; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart for explaining initial operation processing in another example of the second modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining single-shot command processing in a third modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing in a third modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining return operation processing in a third modified example; FIG. It is a figure explaining the operation range of the movable production|presentation apparatus in a 4th modification.

<First embodiment>
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.

The game machine 10 of this embodiment has a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . In addition, the front frame (body frame) 12, the game board 3
A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the device 0 is attached.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built in the left and right of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. is changed to an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided on the lower portion of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (
a storage tray), an upper tray ball outlet 22 through which game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 flow out, and game balls paid out when the upper tray 21 is full. A storage lower tray (receiving tray) 23, an operation section 24 of the ball shooting device, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 21
At the upper edge of the is a production button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player.
A performance button 25 with built-in is provided. Further, a touch panel 29 is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 for receiving contact operation input from the player.
Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .
In this embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Also, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card
etc. are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation portion 24, the batted ball shooting device moves the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game board 30.
It shoots toward the game area 32 on the front. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), the effect etc. that intervened the operation of the player are performed. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30 . The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . Further, on the left side of the game area 32, a guide wall 491 is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 to form a guide path 490 for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32.

In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40 . That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41 to prevent game balls from jumping into the surrounding game area 32 .

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), information related to the game such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that direct the special symbol fluctuation display game, and background images that enhance the performance effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.). In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 for effecting a game by operating it. This board effect device 44 can operate toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 that provides a starting condition for the normal pattern fluctuation display game. A game ball that has won the normal figure starting gate 34 is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 31). In addition, two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening is arranged in the lower right part of the special variable winning device 38 arranged in the lower right part of the center case 40. 35 are arranged. The game balls that have entered these general winning holes 35 are detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 31).

Below the center case 40, the first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) and the second special drawing fluctuation display that give the starting condition of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) A winning device 90 having a second starting winning opening 97 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that provides a condition for starting the game (special figure 2 variable display game) is provided. This prize winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 that alternately distributes game balls flowing into an upper inlet 91 to a first start prize winning port 36 and a second start prize winning port 97 inside. The distribution member 92 is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the tilting direction changes depending on the weight of the game balls flowing in. The game balls are alternately distributed to the start winning opening 97.例文帳に追加The game ball that has entered the first start winning port 36 is detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 31), and the game ball that has entered the second starting winning port 97 is detected by the starting port 3 switch 97a.
(See FIG. 31). In addition, below the prize winning device 90, an out port 30a is provided for collecting game balls that did not win a prize such as a prize winning port.

In addition, on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable prize winning device 37 (second starting prize winning port, starting prize winning area) that gives the starting condition of the second special figure variable display game is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 is equipped with a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which the upper end side is turned in a direction in which it falls to the right to open and allow game balls to easily flow in. This movable member 37b is always It maintains a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which it is almost vertical and game balls cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is rotated to the right by the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 31) as a driving device, and the normal fluctuation is performed. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which game balls can easily flow. The game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the starting port 2
It is detected by the switch 37a (see FIG. 31). In addition, it is also possible to make it possible to win prizes even when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is closed, and make it more difficult to win prizes in the closed state than in the open state.

On the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, a downflow path 615 whose front side is covered with a transparent cover and communicates vertically is formed, and the game balls that do not win the normal variable winning device 37 pass through the downflow path 615. flow down to A guiding portion 616 is provided below the flow-down passage 615 . The guide portion 616 has an upper surface 617 that slopes down to the left so that the game ball that flows downward is guided by the upper surface 61 .
7 and lead to the left where the special variable winning device 38 exists. In addition, the guide section 616 is provided with an information display device 630 for displaying information about the special figure variation display game.

This information display device 630 includes a first information display unit that displays the number of first start memories that are the right to execute the first special figure variation display game, and a second start memory that is the right to run the second special figure variation display game. a second information display section for displaying the number of Separately from the decoration special figure variation display game displayed by the first to third symbols on the display device 41, the decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the first special figure variation display game is displayed by the fourth symbol. The third information display section and the display device 41 display the first to third
A fourth information display section for displaying a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to a second special figure variation display game by a fourth figure is provided separately from the decoration special figure variation display game displayed by the symbols.

Each of the first information display section and the second information display section is composed of two light emitting members, and each of the third information display section and the fourth information display section is composed of one light emitting member. In the second display device, three of these six light-emitting members are arranged side by side in two rows on the left and right. The upper two light emitting members in the right column constitute a first information display portion, and the upper two light emitting members in the left column constitute a second information display portion. Further, one lower light-emitting member in the right column constitutes a third information display portion, and one lower light-emitting member in the left column constitutes a fourth information display portion.

Each of the first information display portion and the second information display portion is composed of two light-emitting members, and a design is applied around each information display portion so that the two light-emitting members are related to each other. At a glance, it can be seen that one information display section is composed of two light emitting members. In addition, the third information display portion and the fourth information display portion are each composed of one light-emitting member, but the designs around these information display portions are designed so that it can be seen that they are independent of each other. At a glance, it can be seen that the information display section is composed of one light emitting member. The design around the light-emitting member is designed to have a sense of unity with the design of the entire game machine so as not to impair the aesthetic appearance. In addition, the design around the light-emitting member is
Since it is molded as a member constituting the guide portion 616 instead of having a sticker or the like attached thereto, it is possible to reduce labor and costs during manufacturing.

Furthermore, in the lower right part of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 that can be converted between a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. is set. The details of the configuration of the special variable winning device 38 will be described later, but depending on the result of the special figure variable display game as an auxiliary game, the opening and closing member 990
The opening/closing member 990 retracts from the closed state (disadvantageous closed state for the player) in which the big winning opening is closed to the open state (the advantageous state for the player) in which the game balls flowing down the game area 32 can be received. do. That is, the special variable winning device 38 has a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening and closing member 990 driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 31) as a driving device, and during the special game state (first special game state) And during the small hit game state (second special game state),
By changing the closed state of the big winning hole to the open state, the game balls can easily flow into the big winning hole, and a predetermined game value (a prize ball) is awarded to the player. In addition, inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 31) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening. .

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game area 32 in which game balls flow down, the area to the left of the center case 40 is defined as the left area, and the area to the right of the center case 40 is defined as the right area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the shooting momentum and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left-handed hitting), so that the first start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 97 of the winning device 90
, You can aim to win a prize to the general winning port 35, and by shooting a game ball to the right game area (so-called right hitting), you can win a prize to the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38. can be aimed at.

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), a special figure 1 fluctuation display game, a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and a normal figure start gate 34 are displayed. A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a general pattern variation display game used as a trigger and for displaying various information.

The collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 composed of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) etc.
Consists of a special figure 1 indicator (first special figure variation display unit) 51 for the variation display game and a special figure 2 indicator (second special figure variation display unit) 52 for the special figure 2 variation display game, and an LED lamp equipped with various displays. Various indicators include a special figure 1 pending display for notifying the number of starting memories of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a special figure 2 holding indicator for notifying the number of starting memories of the special figure 2 variable display game. . In addition, the round display unit that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device opens and closes), the first game state display unit that informs whether it is in a time saving state (during normal electric support, during a specific game state), left A second game state display section is included for notifying the player of a hitting method (a hitting method corresponding to the game state) that is advantageous to the player, out of hitting (normal hitting) and hitting to the right. In addition, a third game state display unit (third game state display device, probability state display unit) that displays that the probability state of a big hit is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, a normal pattern fluctuation display game It includes a normal map display for the game, and a normal map holding display for notifying the start memory number of the normal map fluctuation display game.

In the special figure 1 display device 51, during the variation time of the first special figure variation display game, the special figure 1 varying display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. When the variation time of the first special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result of the first special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the display during special figure 1 fluctuation and the lighting pattern displayed as the result mode form identification information (special figure, special figure) for displaying the first special figure variation display game.

In the special figure 2 display device 52, during the variation time of the second special figure variation display game, the special figure 2 varying display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. When the variation time of the second special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result of the second special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 2 fluctuation display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result mode form identification information (special figure, special figure) for displaying the second special figure variation display game.

During the variation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern display device repeats the display during normal pattern fluctuation, in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. and,
When the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the normal pattern fluctuation display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result mode form identification information (normal pattern, normal pattern) for displaying the general pattern fluctuation display game.

The special figure 1 reservation display device displays the number of first starting memories (first reservation number), which is the execution right of the first special figure variation display game, by extinguishing, blinking, and lighting a plurality of light emitting parts. The special figure 2 reservation display device displays the number of second starting memories (second reservation number), which is the execution right of the second special figure variation display game, by extinguishing, blinking, and lighting a plurality of light emitting parts. The normal pattern holding display displays the number of normal pattern starting memories (normal pattern holding number), which is the right to execute the normal pattern fluctuation display game, by extinguishing, blinking, and lighting a plurality of light emitting parts.

The round display part turns off all the light emitting parts when the special game state is not in effect, and sets the lighting mode corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. The first game state display unit (time saving state notification unit) turns off the lamp in the normal game state where the time saving state does not occur (when the variable time reduction function is not activated), and the time saving state occurs If there is (when the variable time reduction function is activated), turn on the lamp. The second game state display unit (right-handed informing unit) 57 turns off the lamp when the game state is such that left-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (during normal hitting). When the game state is such that the right-handed player is more advantageous to the player (right-handed player), the lamp is turned on. The third game state display unit lights the LED when the power is turned on in the high probability state, and turns off the LED when the high probability state is not reached.

Next, details of the game board 30 in the game machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped game board main body 80, a front structural member 600 constituting the front side portion of the center case 40, and a rear side portion of the center case 40 and a game board. and a rear structural member 700 to which various members necessary for 30 are attached.

The front structural member 600 is attached by being fitted from the front side into an opening 81 formed in the game board main body 80 and penetrating therethrough in the front-rear direction. This front structural member has an annular base member 610 to which various members are attached. The base member 610 is inserted into an opening 81 penetrating back and forth formed in the game board main body 80, and a peripheral wall 611 forming a front portion of an inner peripheral wall in a recessed space recessed rearward from the game area 32. , and a plate-shaped collar-shaped mounting portion 612 formed perpendicular to the peripheral wall 611 at the front end of the peripheral wall 611 .

The portion of the mounting portion 612 formed outside the space surrounded by the surrounding wall 611 is formed in the opening 81 when the front component 600 is inserted from the front side into the opening 81 formed in the game board main body 80. It extends outside the peripheral edge, and the rear surface thereof contacts the front surface of the game board main body 80. - 特許庁As a result, the forward and backward positions of the front structural member 600 with respect to the game board main body 80 are set to predetermined forward and rearward positions. In addition, a plurality of screw holes are formed in the mounting portion 612 so that the front structural member 600 can be fixed to the game board main body 80 with screws. Further, a part of the mounting portion 612 is arranged on the front side of the game board main body 80 at a position visible to the player, and the front surface is decorated. In addition, the base member 610 is also formed with screw holes, screwing portions, bosses for positioning, recesses for receiving bosses, slits for receiving ribs, and the like, so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. It's becoming

On the front surface of the base member 610, there are a stage portion 620 and a warp flow path forming member 614, which will be described later.
A regulation wall 613 is provided except for the portion where the normal variable winning device 37 is arranged. The regulation wall 613 is forwardly forward by the front-rear width of the game area 32 (the width from the front surface of the game board main body 80 to the rear surface of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30) from the mounting portion 612. It is designed to extend. Therefore, by attaching the front structural member 600 to a predetermined position of the game board main body 80, the regulation wall 613 located on the front side of the attachment portion 612 extends into the game area 32, and the game ball flowing down the game area 32 is centered. Inflow into the case 40 is restricted. Thereby, the visibility of the display device 41 is ensured and the stage section 6
The number of inflows of game balls to 20 is restricted.

In addition, on the left side as viewed from the front side of the base member 610, a warp flow that forms a warp flow path that receives game balls flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 40 and guides them to the stage portion 620 A passage forming member 614 is attached. Warp channel forming member 614
is attached to the front surface of the mounting portion 612, and the width of the game area 32 from the mounting portion 612 (the width from the front surface of the game board main body 80 to the back surface of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front of the game board 30) It is designed to extend forward by the amount of . Further, the upper end of the warp flow path forming member 614 is connected to the lower end of a regulation wall 613 attached to the left side of the base member 610 so as to extend forward from the attachment portion 612 . It has become.

The warp flow path formed by the warp flow path forming member 614 is a cylindrical flow path having an inner diameter that allows the game balls to flow down in a row, and opens toward the left side of the center case 40, the play area 32. A game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be received. This upstream end forms the inlet of the warp channel. Further, the warp flow path is an L-shaped flow path that guides the game ball that has flowed in from the upstream end to the lower right and then to the rear. The downstream end is opened rearward to guide the game ball to the left end of the stage section 620 .

The stage portion 620 allows game balls to roll forward, backward, leftward, and rightward, and both the left and right sides are inclined surfaces that descend toward the center, and the central portion directly above the inlet 91 of the winning device 90 protrudes upward. It is formed in a substantially W shape. Although the central portion of the stage portion 620 protrudes upward, it is lower than the left and right ends. A game ball flows into this stage portion 620 through a warp channel from the left end and rolls along the left-right direction. In addition, game balls bounced below the stage portion 620 can also flow in.

In this substantially W-shaped stage portion 620, forwardly descending inclined surfaces 621 are formed at the lowest portions located on both sides of the upwardly protruding central portion. The inclined surface 621 guides the game ball whose flowing force has weakened on the stage portion 620 from the front end of the stage portion 620 to the game area 32 below.

Further, in the stage portion 620 formed in a substantially W shape, a groove-shaped flow-down passage 622 extending in the front-rear direction and descending rearward is formed at the apex of the upwardly protruding central portion. formed. This downflow path 622 is a shallow groove, and many game balls roll left and right without being fitted in the groove. A game ball fitted in the downflow path 622 is guided backward, flows into an inlet (not shown), and flows into a guide flow path 623 formed below the stage portion 620 . Guide channel 623
is a channel that descends forward, and the downstream end is located directly above the inlet 91 of the prize winning device 90, so that it flows into the prize winning device 90 with a high probability.

In addition, on the right side of the front structural member 600 viewed from the front side, there is provided a normal figure starting gate 34 through which game balls can pass up and down. The normal figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a for detecting a passing game ball. Furthermore, below the normal figure starting gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37 having a movable member 37b is provided. A game ball that has won a prize in this normal variable prize winning device 37 is guided to the rear of the front structural member 600 and flows into a discharge channel (not shown). In addition, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is provided with a starting port 2 switch for detecting a winning game ball and a normal electric solenoid 37c for driving a movable member 37b.

A downflow path 615 whose front side is covered with a transparent cover and communicates vertically is formed on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, and the game balls that do not win the normal variable winning device 37 pass through the downflow path 615 downward. flow down to A guiding portion 616 is provided below the flow-down passage 615 . The upper surface 617 of the guiding portion is an inclined surface that descends to the left, so that the upper surface 617 catches the game ball flowing down the downflow passage 615 and guides it to the left. In addition, the guide section 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information about the special figure variation display game.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the rear structural member 700 has a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a recess 711 opening forward. A stopper, a boss for positioning, a recess for receiving the boss, a slit for receiving the rib, and the like are formed so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. Also, at the front end of the rear base member 710, a brim-shaped fixing portion 713 extending outward perpendicularly to the side wall 712 is formed, and the rear component member 700 is fixed to a predetermined position on the back surface of the game board main body 80. It can be fixed in position. A rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 is formed with a through hole 715 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This through-hole 715 enables the display surface of the display device 41 attached to the rear of the rear base member 710 to be visually recognized.

The display device 41 attached to the back surface of the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 includes a liquid crystal display device having a display surface capable of covering the entire through hole 715 formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710. there is The display device 41 is attached so that the display surface faces the front side, so that the image on the display surface can be viewed from the front of the game board 30 through the through hole 715 formed in the rear base member 710 . It is Note that the display device 41 is not limited to having a liquid crystal display device, and may have, for example, a display such as an EL display or a CRT display.

A lower movable accessory unit 730, an upper movable accessory unit 800, and a central movable accessory, which constitute the board effect device 44, which is a movable effect device that performs game effects by operating, are placed inside the recess 711 of the rear base member 710. A unit 880 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 3 , the lower movable accessory unit 730 is arranged below the through hole 715 . Figure 5
8, the lower movable accessory unit 730 includes two first lower movable members 740 and 741 imitating banners and a second lower movable member 770 imitating a gourd. It is operable to make the movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 appear on the front side of the display device 41 . In addition, the lower movable accessory unit 730 includes the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second
A first lower base portion 731 arranged on the front side, a second lower base portion 732 arranged in the center, and a base portion arranged on the back side serve as base portions for mounting a driving mechanism for operating the lower movable member 770 and various members. A third lower base portion 733 is provided.

A motor 734 serving as a drive source for driving the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 is located in the lower right portion of the third lower base portion 733 as seen from the front side, with the drive shaft extending in the front-rear direction. installed along. The lower movable accessory unit 730 includes first lower movable members 740 and 74
1 and a second lower movable member 770 are provided and are driven by a single motor 734 . A driving force from a motor 734 is applied to a first gear 735 rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a second gear 737 meshing with the first gear 735 and rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. transmitted at the same time. The first gear 735 is for operating the first lower movable members 740 and 741, and on the front side is the first gear for transmitting power to the first lower movable members 740 and 741.
A drive shaft 736 is provided to extend forward.

A first light shielding plate 739 is provided on the outer periphery of the first gear 735 so as to extend in the radial direction. This first light blocking plate 739 can be detected by a first detection sensor 781 (shown in FIG. 7) provided adjacent to the first gear 735 . The first detection sensor 781 is an optical sensor having a detection portion in which a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval. It is arranged so that the gap between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion in the detecting portion is positioned on the circumference along which the first light shielding plate 739 provided on the first gear 735 moves.

The second gear 737 is for operating the second lower movable member 770, and a second drive shaft 738 for transmitting power to the second lower movable member 770 extends rearward on the back side. is provided in As will be described later, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are driven by the driving force transmitted through the first drive shaft 736 when the motor 734 is driven in a predetermined direction (clockwise when viewed from the front side). When the second lower movable member 770 drives the motor 734 in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise when viewed from the front side), the driving force is transmitted through the second drive shaft 738 . configured to work with

As shown in FIG. 6, one of the first lower movable members 740 has a bearing portion 742 at its lower end. is rotatably supported by the The bearing portion 742 is a gear, and receives the driving force from the motor 734 so that the first lower movable member 740 can move about the rotating shaft 751 .
Similarly, the other first lower movable member 741 also has a bearing portion 743 at its lower end.
43 is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft 752 provided on the upper portion of the second lower base portion 732 and extending in the front-rear direction. The bearing portion 743 is a gear, and receives the driving force from the motor 734 so that the first lower movable member 741 can move around the rotating shaft 752 .

The gear of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740 supported by the rotating shaft 751 on the left side as viewed from the front is doubled in the front-rear direction. It is designed to receive The gear on the rear side transmits the driving force to the gear of the bearing portion 743 provided on the other first lower movable member 741, and one motor 734 drives the two first lower movable members 740, 741 can operate simultaneously.

The gear on the front side of the bearing portion 742 provided in the first lower movable member 740 that is pivotally supported by the rotating shaft 751 on the left side as viewed from the front is arranged below the bearing portion 742 and is centered on the axis along the front-rear direction. meshes with a gear 753 rotatable at the same time. This gear 753 is a slide member 760 provided on the front surface of the second lower base portion 732 so as to be slidable to the left and right with respect to the second lower base portion 732 .
The slide member 760 engages with a rack gear 761 provided on the upper part of the
left and right, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are operated.

The slide member 760 is a plate-like member, and is arranged so that the plate surface is along the front surface of the second lower base portion 732 . The slide member 760 is formed with an oval supported portion 762 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction. By inserting 754, it is slidably supported in the left-right direction. Furthermore, the first lower base portion 731 attached to the front of the second lower base portion 732 covers the slide member 760 so that the slide member 760 is held so as not to drop forward.

A linear through-hole 763 is formed in the slide member 760 so as to extend through it in the front-rear direction. The through hole 763 has an arcuate portion and a straight portion extending downward from the right end of the arcuate portion as viewed from the front side. A first drive shaft 736 provided on the first gear 735 is inserted through the through hole 763 from behind, and the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the slide member 760 .

FIG. 6(a) shows the initial state in which the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all at their initial positions. In this state, the first drive shaft 736 is located at the connecting portion of the arcuate portion and the straight portion of the through hole. The arc radius of the arc portion of the through hole 763 is equal to the length from the center of the first gear 735 to the center of the first drive shaft 736 . In the initial state, the center of the first gear 735 and the center of the circle forming the arc of the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 763 coincide in the front-rear direction. Also, in this way, the first lower movable member 740,
741 is at the initial position, the first light shielding plate 739 is retracted from the gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion, and the detection result of the first detection sensor 781 is ON (FIGS. 5 and 7A). reference).

From this initial state, when the first gear 735 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front side, the first
The drive shaft 736 pushes the slide member 760 leftward and moves along the straight portion of the through hole 763 . As a result, the slide member 760 slides leftward as shown in FIG.
When the rack gear 761 rotates the gear 753 , the first lower movable members 740 and 741 rotate upward and appear in front of the display device 41 . When returning to the initial state, the operation is opposite to that described above. As will be described later, by driving the motor 734 so that the first gear 735 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side from the initial state, the second lower movable member 7 can be rotated.
70 can be operated. At this time, since the first drive shaft 736 moves along the arcuate portion of the through hole 763 , the slide member 760 is not pressed, and the first lower movable member 7 is moved.
40,741 do not work. The same applies when returning the second lower movable member 770 from the operating state to the initial state.

In addition, by rotating the first gear 735 clockwise from the initial state as viewed from the front side to move the first lower movable members 740 and 741 from the initial positions, the first light shielding plate 739 moves between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. , and the detection result of the first detection sensor 781 is turned OFF. When the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are not at the initial positions, the first light shielding plate 739 is positioned at the first detection sensor 78 .
1 is provided in a range such that the state of entering the detection unit 1 is maintained, and the first detection sensor 7
81 is in the OFF state, the effect control device 300 controls the first lower movable members 740, 7
41 is not in the initial position. That is, the first detection sensor 781 serves as position detecting means capable of detecting the positions of the first lower movable members 740 and 741, which are movable effect devices forming the board effect device 44, and the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are at the initial positions. It forms a production accessory switch 47 that detects that it is in.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, the second lower movable member 770 has a rotating shaft 7 extending in the front-rear direction at its lower end.
71 , and this pivot shaft is rotatably supported by a second lower base portion 732 and a third lower base portion 733 . In the vicinity of the rotating shaft 771, a linear through hole 77 penetrating back and forth is provided.
2 is formed. The through hole 772 has an arcuate portion and a straight portion extending from the left end of the arcuate portion as viewed from the front side in the state shown in FIG. This through hole 772 has a second
A second drive shaft 738 provided on the gear 737 is inserted from the front, and the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the second lower movable member 770 .

A second light shielding plate 773 extending in the radial direction of the rotation shaft is provided near the rotation shaft 771 and at a position facing the through hole 772 with the rotation shaft 771 interposed therebetween. This second light shielding plate 773 can be detected by a second detection sensor 782 (shown in FIG. 7) provided adjacent to the second lower movable member 770 . The second detection sensor 782 is an optical sensor having a detection portion in which a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval. It is arranged so that the gap between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion in the detection portion is positioned on the circumference along which the second light shielding plate 773 provided on the second lower movable member 770 moves.

FIG. 7(a) shows the initial state in which the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all at their initial positions. In this state, the second drive shaft 738 is positioned at the connecting portion of the arcuate portion and the straight portion of the through hole 772 . The arc radius of the arc portion of the through hole 772 is equal to the length from the center of the second gear 737 to the center of the second drive shaft 738 . In the initial state, the center of the second gear 737 and the center of the circle forming the arc of the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 772 coincide in the front-rear direction.

In this state, the first light shielding plate 739 is retracted from the detection portion of the first detection sensor 781, and the first detection sensor 781 is turned on. Also, the second light shielding plate 773 is retracted from the detection portion of the second detection sensor 782, and the second detection sensor 782 is turned on. Thus, the first detection sensor 7
Based on the fact that both the 81 and the second detection sensor 782 are in the ON state, the effect control device 30
It can be understood that 0 is the initial state in which both the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are at their initial positions.

From this initial state, when the motor 734 is driven so as to rotate the second gear 737 clockwise when viewed from the front side, the second drive shaft 738 pushes the second lower movable member 770 upward while the through hole 772 is opened. Move a straight line. As a result, the second lower movable member 770 rotates upward and appears in front of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 7B. When returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial state, the operation is opposite to that described above.

Further, when the second lower movable member 770 is moved from the initial position, the second light shielding plate 773 enters the detection portion of the second detection sensor 782 and the second detection sensor 782 is turned off. When the second lower movable member 770 is not at the initial position, the second light shielding plate 773 is positioned at the second detection sensor 78 .
2 is provided in a range such that the state of entering the detection portion of 2 is maintained, and the second detection sensor 7
82 is in the OFF state, the effect control device 300 can grasp that the second lower movable member 770 is not at the initial position. That is, the operating state of the second lower movable member 770 can be detected from the detection result of the second detection sensor 782, and the second detection sensor 782 can detect the position of the second lower movable member 770 forming a movable effect device. The second
It constitutes a performance accessory switch 47 that detects that the lower movable member 770 is at the initial position.

It should be noted that when the second lower movable member 770 is moved from the initial position, the first gear 735 is shown in FIG.
From the state shown in a), it rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side to reach the state shown in FIG. 7(b). first
The light shielding plate 739 is provided in a range in which a state in which it does not enter the detection portion of the first detection sensor 781 is maintained in this process, and the first detection sensor 781 remains in the ON state.
Of course, in the process of returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position, the operation is opposite to this, so the first detection sensor 781 remains in the ON state.

Further, as described above, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 can be operated by driving the motor 734 so that the second gear 737 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side from the initial state. At this time, since the second drive shaft 738 moves along the arcuate portion of the through hole 772, it does not press the second lower movable member 770, and the second lower movable member 770 does not move. The same applies when returning the first lower movable members 740 and 741 from the operating state to the initial state.

As described above, when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are moved from their initial positions, the first gear 735 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front side from the state shown in FIG. 7(a). As a result, the first light shielding plate 739 enters the detection portion of the first detection sensor 781 and the first detection sensor 781 is turned off.
F state. The first light shielding plate 739 is provided in a range in which the state of entering the detection portion of the first detection sensor 781 is maintained when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are not in the initial positions. Based on the fact that the sensor 781 is in the OFF state, the effect control device 300 can grasp that the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are not at the initial positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, when the second lower movable member 770 rotates upward and appears in front of the display device 41, an effect display emphasizing the second lower movable member 770 is displayed on the display device 41. It is possible. Of course, the effects may be displayed in the same way even when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 appear in front of the display device 41 . Further, the display mode of the effect display is not limited to this, and any display that emphasizes the movable member appearing on the front side of the display device 41 may be used.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs are provided in a gourd-like portion of the second lower movable member 770 so as to enable decoration by emitting light. In addition, the letters "Dealca" are also designed to emit light. These four characters are designed to emit light independently,
As for "ru", the "no" part and the "re" part emit light independently. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 7B and 8, it is possible to display "dere" by causing only the "de" part and the "re" part of "ru" to emit light. there is By dividing the characters in this way so that different information can be displayed, a novel effect can be achieved. In addition, the display of "Dere" notifies that it is a Dere mode, which is one of a plurality of effect modes. By notifying the effect mode by means of the display on the movable member in this way, the set effect mode can be clearly communicated to the player.

As shown in FIG. 3 , the upper movable accessory unit 800 is arranged above and on both sides of the through hole 715 . As shown in FIG. 9, the upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a circular first upper movable member 848
and a second upper movable member 860 imitating a tiger's hand, these first upper movable member 848, second
An effect is produced by operating the upper movable member 860 .

The upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a base member 8 attached to a rear base member 710
01, and a movable member unit 820 that is vertically movable with respect to the base member 801 and that includes a first upper movable member 848. As shown in FIG. The base member 801 has a U-shape when viewed from the front side, and includes an upper base portion 802 disposed above the through hole 715 and a left base portion disposed to the left of the through hole 715 when viewed from the front side. 803 and a right base portion 804 arranged on the right side of the through hole 715 when viewed from the front side.

A guide portion 805 extending in the vertical direction is provided at the right end portion of the left base portion 803 and the left end portion of the right base portion 804 . The guide portion 805 guides the movable member unit 820 along the vertical direction. Further, the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 are each provided with a driving mechanism 806 for driving the movable member unit 820 up and down.
Of the drive mechanisms 806 that drive the movable member unit 820 up and down, the drive mechanism 806 that performs the left-side operation when viewed from the front side is referred to as a movable member unit (left), and the drive mechanism 806 that performs the right-side operation is movable. Sometimes referred to as a component unit (right).

Each drive mechanism 806 has a motor 807 as a drive source, and by driving the motor 807, the arm rotates. A drive shaft 809 is provided at the tip of the arm. The drive shaft 809 is connected to the link member 830 of the movable member unit 820 , and the link member 830 is operated by driving the motor 807 to move the movable member unit 8 .
20 can be driven up and down.

The movable member unit 820 includes a link member 830 connected to the drive mechanism 806, a unit base portion 841 for attaching various members, a first upper movable member 848 arranged in front of the unit base portion 841, and a unit base. A first drive section (not shown) that drives the first upper movable member and a second drive section (not shown) that drives the second upper movable member, and the back surface of the unit base section 841. and a guided member 842 which is fixed to the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 and guided by the guide portions 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 .

The link member 830 is rotatably attached to the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 and arranged to extend in directions facing each other. The link member 830 may be a rotating shaft 810 provided on the left base portion 803 extending forward in the front-rear direction or a rotating shaft provided on the right base portion 804 extending forward in the front-rear direction. A bearing portion 831 through which the 810 is inserted is provided at one end, and is rotatably supported by the left base portion 803 or the right base portion 804 . Further, the link member 830 has a drive shaft 809 provided on the arm of the drive mechanism 806 .
By driving the motor 807 and rotating the arm, the drive shaft 809 moves along the first guide portion 832 and the link member 830 is rotated up and down.

A third light shielding plate 835 extending in the radial direction of the rotating shaft 810 is provided in the vicinity of the bearing portion 831 of the link member 830 pivotally supported by the left base portion 803 . This third light shielding plate 835
can be detected by a third detection sensor 811 provided adjacent to the rotation shaft 810 of the left base portion 803 . The third detection sensor 811 is an optical sensor having a detection portion in which a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval. The gap between the light emitting part and the light receiving part in the detection part is the third light shielding plate 8
35 are arranged so as to be at positions on the circumference to be moved.

A fourth light shielding plate 836 extending in the radial direction of the rotation shaft 810 is provided in the vicinity of the bearing portion 831 of the link member 830 pivotally supported by the right base portion 804 . This fourth light shielding plate 836
can be detected by a fourth detection sensor 812 provided adjacent to the rotation shaft 810 of the right base portion 804 . The fourth detection sensor 812 is an optical sensor having a detection portion in which a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval. The gap between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion in the detection portion is the fourth light shielding plate 8
36 are positioned on the circumference of the movement.

Further, a connection shaft for connecting to the unit base portion 841 of the movable member unit 820 is provided so as to extend rearward at the other end portion of the link member 830 that faces the one end portion where the bearing portion 831 is provided. there is Also, the link member 830 has a second guide portion 834 which is an elongated hole through which a support shaft can be inserted, provided at one end of the back surface of the second upper movable member 860 attached to cover the front side of the link member 830 . is formed, and the second guide portion 834 guides and supports one end of the second upper movable member 860 .

The unit base portion 841 has a circular body portion and supported portions 845 extending left and right from the body portion.
and The supported portion 845 is formed with a third guide portion, which is an elongated hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends left and right. The unit base portion 841 moves up and down according to the operation of the link member 830 based on the drive of the motor 807 . A guided member 842 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base portion 841 . The guided member 842 is a plate-shaped member arranged to extend in the left-right direction. 843 is provided.

A circular first upper movable member 848 is provided on the front side of the main body. This first upper movable member 848 has a rotating shaft provided in the center of the back surface along the front-rear direction that is rotatably supported by the main body. It is designed to rotate around a rotation axis. The rotatable first upper movable member 84 is included in the first drive section.
A fifth detection sensor is provided for detecting when 8 is in the initial position.

Also, the second driving section provided in the main body can drive the second upper movable member 860 independently of the first upper movable member 848 . The second driving part is the second upper movable member 860
The driving arm 853 is capable of swinging left and right. A second upper movable member 860 is connected to the other end of the drive arm 853, and by swinging the drive arm 853 left and right, the second upper movable member 860 swings left and right. Further, the second drive section is provided with an eighth detection sensor that detects that the swingable second upper movable member 860 is at the initial position.

9 to 11 show the operation of the upper movable accessory unit 800. FIG. Note that some members are omitted for the sake of explanation. FIG. 9 shows an initial state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the initial position at the upper end of its range of motion, and the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are also at their initial positions.
Also, in FIG. 10, the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operating range, but the first upper movable member 848 is
and the second upper movable member 860 is in the initial position. Further, FIG. 11 shows an operating state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of its operating range and the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are also operating from their initial positions.

In the initial state shown in FIG. 9, the movable member unit 820 is positioned at the upper end of its range of motion. In this state, the third light shielding plate 835 is positioned at the detection portion of the third detection sensor 811, the fourth light shielding plate 836 is positioned at the detection portion of the fourth detection sensor 812, and the third detection sensor 811 is positioned at the detection portion.
and the fourth detection sensor 812 are both turned off. Also, the fifth detection sensor and the eighth detection sensor are turned off. When the drive mechanism 806 is operated from this initial state to rotate the drive shaft 809 provided at the tip of the arm toward the display device 41 side, the link member 830 is rotated downward, and the movable member unit 820 is moved. Move down. And the movable member unit 820
10, the drive shaft 809 is positioned at the lower end of the rotation range, and the link member 830 is also positioned at the lower end of the rotation range.

In this state, the third light shielding plate 835 is withdrawn from the detection portion of the third detection sensor 811, the fourth light shielding plate 836 is withdrawn from the detection portion of the fourth detection sensor 812, and the third detection sensor 811 and the third detection sensor 811 are separated from each other. 4 detection sensors 812 are all turned ON. Since the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are at their initial positions, both the fifth detection sensor and the eighth detection sensor are turned off.

That is, the effect control device 300 can grasp that the movable member unit 820 is at the initial position based on the fact that both the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 are OFF. Therefore, the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 constitute the effect accessory switch 47 that detects the initial position of the movable member unit 820 forming the board effect device 44 . again,
The third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 form position detection means capable of detecting the position of the movable member unit 820 forming the movable effect device.

It should be noted that a slight movement of the movable member unit 820 from the initial position will result in a third
Both the detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 continue to be OFF, but the third
By adjusting the range in which the light shielding plate 835 and the fourth light shielding plate 836 are provided, the movable member unit 82
0 is slightly moved from the initial position, the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812
can be set to ON.

When the first driving section is operated, the first upper movable member 848 rotates in one direction, and the fifth detection sensor is turned ON until it returns to the initial position shown in FIG. The first upper movable member 848 can be driven clockwise or counterclockwise. Also, when the second driving section is operated, the second upper movable member 860 is moved toward the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. Repeatedly moving left and right to and from the separated state. The eighth detection sensor is ON until it returns to the initial position shown in FIG. That is, the fifth detection sensor serves as position detection means capable of detecting the position of the first upper movable member 848 forming a movable effect device, and the effect accessory switch detects that the first upper movable member 848 is at the initial position. 47
form. In addition, the eighth detection sensor serves as position detection means capable of detecting the position of the second upper movable member 860 forming a movable effect device, and the effect accessory switch detects that the second upper movable member 860 is at the initial position. Make 47.

That is, the first upper movable member 848 constitutes a first effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive mechanism 806 and the link member 830 are the first drive mechanism portion for operating the first effect movable body. and these constitute the first effect device. In addition, the second upper movable member 860 constitutes a second effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect action, and the drive section 850 constitutes a second drive mechanism for operating the second effect movable body. constitutes the second effect device.

The second upper movable member 860 is arranged to cover and hide the link member 830 in both the initial position shown in FIG. 9 and the position after the operation shown in FIG. It's like By covering the link member 830 with the second upper movable member 860 that operates, the player's attention can be attracted to the second upper movable member 860, the line of sight can be effectively prevented from going to the link member 830, and only the action can be performed. A high concealing effect can be obtained as compared with the case of covering with a decorative member that does not cover the cover. Further, particularly at the initial position, as shown in FIG. 2, the link member 830 is covered so as not to be visually recognized by the player. As a result, in the state of the initial position that occupies most of the game, unnecessary parts are not visible to the player, and the decorativeness is improved.

In view of the above, in the gaming machine 10 that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the game results in a special result, the effects related to the game are controlled. Controlled by the production control means (production control device 300) and the production control means,
A first effect device (first upper movable member 848, drive mechanism 806, link member 830) and a second effect device (second upper movable member 860, drive unit 85
0), and the first effect device is a first effect movable body (
A first upper movable member 848) and a first drive mechanism (drive mechanism 806, link member 830) for operating the first effect movable body, and the second effect device performs a predetermined effect operation. and a second drive mechanism (drive unit 850) for operating the second effect movable body (second upper movable member 860), and the first drive mechanism The second effect movable body is arranged so as to cover it.

Therefore, since the second effect movable body is arranged so as to cover the first drive mechanism part, it becomes difficult for the player to see unnecessary parts, and the effect of the effect of the operating effect device can be enhanced, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can be improved. By covering the first drive mechanism part with the second effect movable body that particularly operates, the player's consciousness can be attracted to the second effect movable body, and the line of sight can be effectively prevented from going to the first drive mechanism part. , a high concealing effect can be obtained as compared with the case of simply covering with a decorative member that does not operate.

In addition, the second effect movable body (second upper movable member 860) is at least the first effect movable body (first
When the upper movable member 848) is at the initial position, the first drive mechanism section (link member 830)
is covered so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to see unnecessary parts in the state of the initial position that occupies most of the game, and the performance effect of the operating performance device can be enhanced, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

As shown in FIG. 3, the central movable accessory unit 880 is arranged to surround the through hole 715 . As shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, this central movable accessory unit 880 operates such that a plurality of central movable production members 900, 910, 920, and 930 divided into four are combined in front of the display device 41. This is what the performance is like.

The central movable accessory unit 880 includes a movable production base member 881 attached to the rear base member 710 . In addition, the first central movable production member 900 and the second central movable production member 910 that are arranged on the front upper side of the movable production base member 881 and operate, and the movable production base member 8
A third central movable effect member 920 and a fourth central movable effect member 930 which are arranged on the front lower side of 81 and operate are provided.

The movable effect base member 881 has a first central movable effect member 900 and a second central movable effect member 910 attached to the center in the left-right direction of the portion positioned above the display device 41 . This portion includes a first rotating shaft 882 extending forward along the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the first central movable effect member, and guiding the movement of the first central movable effect member. A first guide portion 883, which is an elongated hole penetrating in the front and rear direction, is provided. Also, a second rotating shaft 884 extending forward along the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the second central movable effect member.
A second guide portion 885, which is an oblong hole penetrating back and forth for guiding the movement of the second central movable effect member, is provided.

A drive source for operating the first central movable production member 900 and the second central movable production member 910 is provided on the right side of the portion of the movable production base member 881 positioned above the display device 41 as seen from the front side. A motor 886 is provided. A plurality of gears and the like for transmitting the driving force of the motor 886 to the first central movable effect member 900 are provided on the back side of the movable effect base member 881 and on the portion from the first rotating shaft 882 to the motor 886. A drive mechanism is arranged, and a rear cover 896 is attached so as to cover the rear surface of this drive mechanism.

Further, a sixth detection sensor 889 is provided on the left side of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located above the display device 41 as viewed from the front side. This sixth detection sensor 88
Reference numeral 9 denotes an optical sensor provided with a detecting portion in which a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion are arranged facing each other with a predetermined interval therebetween. be. A sixth light-shielding plate 916 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the second central movable effect member 910 attached to the front side of this portion, and the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion of the detection portion of the sixth detection sensor 889 are separated. The gaps are arranged so as to be positioned on the circumference along which the sixth light shielding plate 916 moves.

Also, the movable effect base member 881 has a third central movable effect member 920 and a fourth central movable effect member 930 attached to the center in the left-right direction of the portion located on the lower side of the display device 41 . This portion includes a third rotating shaft 891 extending forward along the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the third central movable effect member, and guiding the movement of the third central movable effect member. A third guide portion 892, which is an elongated hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, is provided. In addition, a fourth rotating shaft 893 extending forward along the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the fourth central movable effect member, and a front and rear shaft 893 for guiding the movement of the fourth central movable effect member. 4th
A guide 894 is provided. Then, the display device 4 in the movable production base member 881
A third central movable effect member 920 and a fourth
A motor 895 serving as a drive source for operating the central movable effect member 930 is provided.

Furthermore, a seventh detection sensor 897 is provided in the center of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located below the display device 41 . The seventh detection sensor 897 is an optical sensor having a detection portion in which a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion are arranged facing each other with a predetermined interval. is output. A seventh light shielding plate 92 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the third central movable effect member 920 attached to the front side of this portion.
6 is provided, and the gap between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion in the detection portion of the seventh detection sensor 897 is arranged so as to be positioned on the circumference along which the seventh light shielding plate 926 moves.

The first central movable effect member 900 arranged in the upper right part has a decoration part 901 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41 . Also, at one end of the first central movable effect member 900, there is provided a first bearing portion 902 penetrating before and after the first rotating shaft 882 is inserted, and the first central movable effect member 900 is rotated for the first time. It is rotatably supported around the driving shaft 882 .

In the vicinity of the first bearing portion 902, a sector-shaped first sector gear 903 and a sector-shaped second sector gear 904 centering on the rotation center of the first central movable effect member 900 are provided. The first sector gear 903 is provided so as to face rightward when viewed from the front side. This first sector gear 903 faces the back side of the movable production base member 881 through a through portion 887 formed on the right side of the first rotating shaft 882 in the movable production base member 881 and penetrating back and forth. there is A gear for transmitting the driving force from the motor 886 is meshed with the rear side of the movable production base member 881 .

Also, the second sector gear 904 is provided so as to face leftward when viewed from the front side. This second sector gear 904 meshes with a third sector gear 913 provided on a second central movable production member 910 arranged adjacent to the left of the first central movable production member 900 . As a result, the driving force from the motor 886 received by the first sector gear 903 is also transmitted to the second central movable effect member 910 via the second sector gear 904 . A guided shaft 905 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the first central movable effect member 900 . The guided shaft 905 is inserted through the first guide portion 883, and the first central movable effect member 900
is guided along the extending direction of the first guide portion 883 to allow the first central movable effect member 900 to operate smoothly.

A second central movable effect member 910 arranged in the upper left part has a decoration part 911 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41 . In addition, at one end of the second central movable effect member 910, a second bearing portion 912 penetrating before and after the second rotating shaft 884 is inserted is provided, and the second central movable effect member 910 is rotated for the second time. It is rotatably supported around the driving shaft 884 .

Also, in the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912, a sector-shaped third sector gear 913 centering on the rotation center of the second central movable effect member 910 is provided. The third sector gear 913 is provided so as to face rightward when viewed from the front side. This third sector gear 913 meshes with a second sector gear 904 provided on the first central movable production member 900 arranged adjacent to the right side of the second central movable production member 910 . A guided shaft 914 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the second central movable effect member 910 . This guided shaft 914 is connected to the second guide portion 885
, and when the second central movable effect member 910 rotates, the second
The smooth operation of the second central movable effect member 910 is made possible by being guided along the extending direction of the guide portion 885 .

An engaging portion 915 extending rearward is provided in the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912 .
This engaging portion 915 faces the back side of the movable production base member 881 through a through portion 888 formed on the left side of the second rotating shaft 884 in the movable production base member 881 and penetrating back and forth. there is Then, as shown in FIG. 13(b), one end of a torsion coil spring 889 is engaged with the back side of the movable production base member 881. As shown in FIG. The other end of the torsion coil spring 889 is locked by a locking portion 890 formed on the movable production base member 881, and the engaging portion 915 of the second central movable production member 910 is biased upward. It's like
As a result, the biasing force of the torsion coil spring 889 is applied to the first central movable effect member 900 and the second
The first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 that have moved downward return to their initial positions while assisting in holding the central movable effect member 910 at the initial position, which is the upper end position in the range of motion. It will be an aid.

As shown in FIG. 12 , the third central movable effect member 920 arranged in the lower left part has a decoration part 921 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41 . Also, at one end of the third central movable effect member 920, there is provided a third bearing portion 922 penetrating before and after the third rotating shaft 891 is inserted, and the third central movable effect member 920 is moved to the third rotation. It is rotatably supported around the drive shaft 891 .

In addition, in the vicinity of the third bearing portion 922, a sector-shaped fourth sector gear 923 and a sector-shaped fifth sector gear 924 centering on the rotation center of the third central movable effect member 920 are provided. The fourth sector gear 923 is provided so as to face the lower left side when viewed from the front side. This fourth sector gear 923
is the motor 89 arranged at the lower left part of the third rotating shaft 891 in the movable production base member 881
It is designed to mesh with 5 gears.

Also, the fifth sector gear 924 is provided so as to face rightward when viewed from the front side. The fifth sector gear 924 meshes with the sixth sector gear 933 provided on the fourth central movable production member 930 arranged adjacent to the right side of the third central movable production member 920 . As a result, the driving force from the motor 895 received by the fourth sector gear 923 is also transmitted to the fourth central movable effect member 930 via the fifth sector gear 924 . A guided shaft 925 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the third central movable effect member 920 . The guided shaft 925 is inserted through the third guide portion 892, and the third central movable effect member 920
is guided along the extending direction of the third guide portion 892 to allow the third central movable effect member 920 to operate smoothly.

A fourth central movable effect member 930 arranged in the lower right part has a decorative part 931 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41 . Also, at one end of the fourth central movable effect member 930, there is provided a fourth bearing portion 932 penetrating before and after the fourth rotating shaft 893 is inserted. It is rotatably supported around the drive shaft 893 .

In addition, in the vicinity of the fourth bearing portion 932, a sixth sector gear 933 and a seventh sector gear 934, which are sector-shaped around the rotation center of the fourth central movable effect member 930, are provided. The sixth sector gear 933 is provided so as to face leftward when viewed from the front side. The sixth sector gear 933 meshes with a fifth sector gear 924 provided on the third central movable production member 920 arranged adjacent to the left side of the fourth central movable production member 930 . A guided shaft 935 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the fourth central movable effect member 930 . This guided shaft 9
35 is inserted into the fourth guide portion 894, and when the fourth central movable effect member 930 rotates, it is guided along the extending direction of the fourth guide portion 894, thereby Smooth operation of the 4 center movable production member 930 is enabled.

Also, the seventh sector gear 934 is provided so as to face the lower right side when viewed from the front side. The seventh sector gear 934 is a biasing mechanism 940 arranged at the lower right of the fourth central movable effect member 930.
It meshes with the eighth sector gear 942 provided in the . The biasing mechanism 940 is rotatable about a rotation shaft 941 extending in the front-rear direction, and includes an eighth sector gear 942 . The biasing mechanism 940 is provided so as to extend leftward from the rotation shaft when viewed from the front side, and is biased downward (counterclockwise direction) by a biasing member (not shown). This will
The third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are biased toward the initial position, which is the position of the lower end in the range of motion. Therefore, the biasing force by the biasing mechanism assists in holding the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 at the initial positions, and the third central movable effect member 920 and the upwardly operated third central movable effect member 920 and It assists when the fourth central movable effect member 930 returns to the initial position.

The central movable accessory unit 880 configured as described above has the initial state shown in FIG.
4 can be converted to the operation completion state shown in FIG. In the initial state shown in FIG. 13, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are at the initial position, which is the upper end of the operating range,
The third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are at the initial position, which is the lower end of the operating range, and are in a state of retreating from the front surface of the display device 41 .

In this initial state, the sixth light shielding plate 916 is positioned in the gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sixth detection sensor 889, and the detection result of the sixth detection sensor 889 is OFF. Also, the seventh light shielding plate 926
is located in the gap between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion of the seventh detection sensor 897, and the detection result of the seventh detection sensor 897 is OFF. That is, in the initial state, both the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 are turned off. Based on this, the production control device 300 can grasp that the first central movable production member 900, the second central movable production member 910, the third central movable production member 920, and the fourth central movable production member 930 are at the initial positions. .

In addition, since the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are interlocked, the detection result of the sixth detection sensor 889 confirms that the second central movable effect member 910 is at the initial position. By detecting , it is also possible to detect that the first central movable effect member 900 is at the initial position. Also, the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930
, the fourth central movable effect member 930 detects that the third central movable effect member 920 is at the initial position based on the detection result of the seventh detection sensor 897.
is at the initial position. Therefore, the effect control device 300, the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member based on the fact that both the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 are OFF It can be grasped that 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are in the initial positions.

From this initial state, when the motor 886 is operated, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 rotate so as to descend, and when the motor 895 is operated, the third central movable effect member 920 and The fourth central movable effect member 930 rotates upward. Along with this, the sixth light shielding plate 916 retreats from the detection portion of the sixth detection sensor 889, and the detection result of the sixth detection sensor 889 is turned ON. Also, the seventh light shielding plate 926 is retracted from the detection portion of the seventh detection sensor 897, and the detection result of the seventh detection sensor 897 is turned ON. That is, the effect control device 300, the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member based on the fact that both the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 are OFF. It can be grasped that 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are in the initial positions.

Therefore, the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 are the first central movable production member 900, the second central movable production member 910, and the third central movable production member 920, which form the board production device 44.
and a position detecting means capable of detecting the position of the fourth central movable production member 930, and a production accessory switch 47 for detecting the initial position.

14, the decorative portion 901 of the first central movable effect member 900
, the decorative portion 911 of the second central movable production member 910, the decorative portion 9 of the third central movable production member 920
21 and the decorative portion 931 of the fourth central movable effect member 930 are arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the display device 41 . In addition, the end surfaces of the respective decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931 are opposed to and close to the end surfaces of the adjacent decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931, forming a circular shape as a whole. ing. The decorative portions 901, 911, 921, and 931 are made of a material that does not transmit light, and the portions where the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, and 931 are located are in a state where the display of the display device 41 cannot be viewed from the front.

Next, the configuration of the special variable winning device 38 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 15 to 17, the special variable winning device 38 includes a channel rear wall 962 arranged along the front surface of the game board main body 80,
Sandwiched between the flow path front wall 952 disposed on the front side of the flow path rear wall 962, a downflow path 38f in which game balls can flow down in a row is provided. This flow-down path 38f is inclined so as to descend to the left when viewed from the front side, and the game balls flow down in a line toward the left.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the bottom surface of the substantially central portion of the downflow passage 38f is composed of an opening/closing member 990 that can slide in the front-rear direction. The opening/closing member 990 is shown in FIGS.
As shown in (a), the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening 38d) is protruded forward and the game ball cannot enter the closed state, and as shown in FIG. Prize-winning entrance 3
8d can be converted to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize. That is, when the opening/closing member 990 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the flow path 38f flows down the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 and passes through the big winning opening 38d, and when the opening/closing member 990 is in the open state, It is designed to flow into the big prize gate. Note that when the opening/closing member 990 is in the closed state, the front wall 9 of the channel
There is a gap between it and 52, but the gap is such that game balls cannot flow in.

As shown in FIG. 18, the special variable winning device 38 includes a front wall member 950 having a flow channel front wall 952.
, a rear wall member 960 having a flow channel rear wall 962 , a body portion 970 to which an opening/closing member 990 and the like are attached, and a cover member 979 covering the back surface of the body portion 970 .

The front wall member 950 has a plate-like front surface portion 951 . The front surface of the front surface part 951 is arranged close to the back surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, and game balls are prevented from flowing down in front of this front surface. In addition, the front surface of the front surface portion 951 is a surface that can be visually recognized by the player, and is decorated with a lens that can partially transmit light. An LED (not shown) is arranged as a decoration means on the back surface of the front wall member 950, so that the special variable winning device 38 can be decorated with light. The color of the light that decorates the special variable winning device 38 is different from the color of light emitted from the collective display device 50, thereby preventing the display of the adjacent collective display device 50 from becoming difficult to understand. Further, the upper portion of the plate-shaped front surface portion 951 serves as a channel front wall 952 forming a side wall on the front side of the downstream channel 38f.

As shown in FIG. 16 , a plurality of front wall projecting portions 9 projecting rearward are provided on the rear surface side of the flow channel front wall 952 .
54 are provided. The front wall projecting portion 954 is a triangular prism-shaped projecting portion with sloped left and right side surfaces.
It is provided so as to be located slightly upstream with respect to 92 . The front wall protruding portion 954 and the protruding portion 992 have a function of guiding backward the game ball flowing leftward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f as will be described later. That is, it forms a contact portion that can be contacted by a game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f. By positioning the front wall protrusion 954 slightly upstream,
A game ball flowing down to the left is guided backward by the front wall projecting portion 954 and then further guided backward by the projecting portion 992, so that the game ball can be effectively guided.

As shown in FIG. 19, on the back side of the front wall member 950, a plurality of rib-shaped extension walls 953 extending rearward from the back surface of a plate-shaped front surface portion 951 are provided. The extension wall 953 has different functions depending on the place where it is provided, and the bottom surface portion 953a forming the bottom surface of the downflow passage 38f.
, a large winning opening forming portion 953b forming the side wall and the bottom surface of the large winning opening 38d, a guiding flow path forming portion 953c forming a guiding flow path 955 for guiding a game ball that has won the big winning opening 38d, and a large winning opening switch 38a. A switch mounting portion forming portion 953d that forms the mounting portion 956 to be attached, a general prize winning port forming portion 953e that forms the general prize winning port 35, a surrounding wall that prevents game balls flowing down around the special variable prize winning device 38 from entering the inside It has the function as 953f.

A bottom surface portion 953a that forms the bottom surface of the downflow passage 38f is an inclined surface that inclines to the right when viewed from the rear surface side. Also, the big winning hole forming part 953b is inclined so as to collect the game balls that have flowed into the big winning hole 38d into the guide channel 955. As shown in FIG. Game balls can flow into the guide channel 955 in a row, and a large winning opening switch 38a is provided at the inflow portion of the guide channel 955 . As a result, all the game balls that have flowed into the big winning opening 38d flow into the guide channel 955 after being detected by the big winning opening switch 38a. A guiding flow path 955 formed by the guiding flow path forming portion 953c is a flow path that guides the game ball from the big winning opening 38d to the back side of the game board 30. A rib 957 is formed for guiding to. In addition, the general prize winning opening forming part 953e forms the general winning prize opening 35 that opens to the right when viewed from the front side of the special variable prize winning device 38 . On the back side of the front part 951 is this general winning port 3
A rib 958 is formed to guide the game ball that has flowed into 5 backward.

As shown in FIG. 20( a ), the rear wall member 960 has a plate-like rear surface portion 961 . A front wall member 950 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 961, and the portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 961 that is not hidden by the front wall member 950 is decorated. The upper portion of the rear surface portion 961 serves as a channel rear wall 962 forming a rear side wall of the downstream channel 38f. In addition, the channel rear wall 9
An opening/closing member inserting portion 963 is formed at the lower end of 62 so as to pass through the opening/closing member 990 from the back side of the rear wall member 960 .

A plurality of rear wall projecting portions 964 projecting forward are provided on the front side of the channel rear wall 962 . As shown in FIG. 16, the rear wall projecting portion 964 is a triangular prism-shaped projecting portion with slanted left and right side surfaces, and is provided at a position adjacent to a plurality of recessed portions 993 provided in the opening/closing member 990 . The rear wall projecting portion 964 and the recessed portion 993 have a function of guiding forward the game ball flowing leftward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f as described later. That is, it forms a contact portion that can be contacted by a game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f. Since the rear wall projecting portion 964 is provided adjacent to the recessed portion 993, the game ball flows into the downflow path 3 in the portion where the recessed portion 993 is not provided.
It is possible to prevent the right part of 8f from flowing down, and to allow the game ball to meander reliably.

Returning to FIG. 20 , the guide channel 95 is located in the front wall member 950 at the central portion of the rear surface portion 961 .
A penetrating portion 968 that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in a portion facing the portion where 5 is formed so that the guide flow path 955 communicates with the rear surface side of the rear surface portion 961 . Also, above the guide channel 955, there is a switch mounting portion 9 penetrating back and forth so as to accommodate the rear portion of the big winning opening switch 38a.
65 are formed. Furthermore, in the right part of the rear surface part 961 and facing the part in which the general winning opening 35 is formed in the front wall member 950, the game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is pushed to the back side of the rear wall member 960. A penetrating portion 966a that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed so as to communicate with the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961 to guide the general winning opening flow path 966 .

As shown in FIG. 20B, a plurality of rib-like extension walls 967 extending rearward from the back surface of the plate-like rear surface portion 961 are provided on the rear surface side of the rear wall member 960 . The extension wall 967 has different functions depending on the place where it is provided. It has a function as a peripheral wall 967c that forms the periphery of the special variable winning device 38.

The guide channel forming portion 967a forms a guide channel 955 so as to guide downward the game ball guided from the penetrating portion 968 to the back side. In addition, the guide channel 955 formed in the rear surface portion 961
A rib 969 for guiding the game ball backward is formed at the downstream end of the . The general winning opening flow path forming part 967b forms the general winning opening flow path 966 so as to guide downward the game ball guided to the back side from the through part 966a. In addition, a rib 966b for guiding the game ball backward is formed at the downstream end of the general winning opening flow path 966 formed in the rear face portion 961 .

The surrounding wall 967c is formed in accordance with the shape of a penetrating portion penetrating back and forth formed in a portion of the game board main body 80 where the special variable winning device 38 is attached.
8 is attached to the game board main body 80, the peripheral wall 967c is inserted into the through portion. Further, the rear surface of the rear surface portion 961 positioned outside the surrounding wall 967c is in a state of being in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the special variable winning device 38 is attached to the game board main body 80. A plurality of bosses for positioning and screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

As shown in FIG. 21 , the body portion 970 includes a peripheral wall 971 that coincides with the peripheral wall 967c of the rear wall member 960 in the front-rear direction. The main body portion 970 is provided with a rear wall portion 972 that forms a rear wall of the guide channel 955 and faces the guide channel forming portion 967 a formed on the back surface of the rear wall member 960 . In the rear wall portion 972 , at a position facing the through portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960 , a game ball guided to the rear surface of the rear wall member 960 through the through portion 968 is guided to the guide flow path 955 . A rib 973 is formed to guide it to the right along it. Further, a through portion 974 is formed in the rear wall portion 972 so as to face the downstream end portion of the guide flow path 955 formed in the rear wall member 960 . The game ball flowing down the guide channel 955 is guided backward by the rib 969 formed on the rear wall member 960, passes through the through portion 974, is guided to the back side of the main body portion 970, and is guided to the outside of the game machine. is designed to flow into a discharge channel for discharging the

In addition, in the portion facing the downstream end of the general winning opening flow path 966 formed in the rear wall member 960, a through hole for guiding the game ball flowing down the general winning opening flow path 966 to the back side of the main body part 970 A portion 975 is formed. The game ball that has flowed down the general winning port channel 966 is guided to the back side of the main body portion 970 through the penetration portion 975, and after being detected by the winning port switch 35a, the discharge flow that discharges the game ball to the outside of the game machine. It is designed to flow into the road.

An opening/closing member holding portion 976 that guides and supports an opening/closing member 990 that moves in the front-rear direction is provided at a position facing the opening/closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960 . The opening/closing member holding portion 976 is a slit-shaped penetrating portion penetrating the front and rear of the main body portion 970.
Guide walls 977 are provided extending in the front-rear direction and capable of contacting the upper, lower, left, and right surfaces of the opening/closing member 990 and capable of guiding and supporting the opening/closing member 990 .

An opening/closing member unit 980 having an opening/closing member 990 and an operation mechanism for operating the opening/closing member 990 is attached to the back side of the main body portion 970 . This opening/closing member unit 980 is
It is provided with a unit base member 981 for attaching various members, an opening/closing member 990 capable of sliding in the front-rear direction, and a large winning opening solenoid 38b for operating the opening/closing member 990 .

The opening/closing member unit 980 has a state in which the opening/closing member 990 is protruded forward as shown in FIG. The opening/closing member 990 can be converted to a state in which the member 990 is retracted backward and a state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened. The opening/closing member 990 can appear above the big prize opening 38 d via an opening/closing member holding portion 976 formed in the main body portion 970 and an opening/closing member inserting portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960 .

The opening/closing member 990 is slidably arranged back and forth on a holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981 . As shown in FIG. 23(a), the opening/closing member 990 has a front end portion extending upward from the large winning opening 38d on the upper surface so as to be one step lower.
is a flow path forming portion 991 forming the bottom surface of the .

A plurality of projecting portions 992 projecting upward are formed in the vicinity of the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990 in the flow path forming portion 991 . The side surface on the upstream side of the projecting portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the downstream side, so that the game ball flowing down from the right side can be smoothly guided backward toward the recessed portion 993 . In addition, the downstream side surface of the projecting portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the upstream side, so that when a game ball flowing forward from the recessed portion 993 comes into contact with it, it can be guided in the downstream direction.

In addition, a recessed portion 993 is formed in a stepped portion of the flow path forming portion 991 that is one step lower and is recessed rearward in a portion that faces the protruding portion 992 in the sliding direction. Recess 9
The gap between the side surface of the stepped portion forming 93 and the side surface of the projecting portion 992 is such that the game balls can flow down in a line at any position. In addition, the downstream side surface of the step portion forming the recessed portion 993 is formed obliquely so that the front side faces the downstream side, so that the game ball can smoothly flow forward from the recessed portion 993. there is

That is, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 is provided with undulations such as protrusions 992 and recesses 993 . As will be described later, such undulations increase the length of time that the game ball stays on the opening/closing member 990 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 23(b), the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 is formed as a slanted surface that descends to the left, so that the game ball flows down toward the left. Slide portions 994 extending downward are formed on the left and right sides of the lower surface of the opening/closing member 990 . The sliding portion 994 is formed to extend in the front-rear direction, and contacts the upper surface of a holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981 so that the opening/closing member 990 is held on the holding portion 982 . It becomes slidable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22(a), the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990 forms an inclined surface 996 which is inclined such that the lower end is located on the rear side of the upper end. Since the inclined surface 996 is formed in this way, when the opening/closing member 990 is closed, the opening/closing member 990 and the channel front wall 952 are separated from each other.
When there is a game ball between and, the game ball can be released upward or downward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, a connecting portion 995 is formed in the central portion of the lower surface of the opening/closing member 990 to which a driving arm 983 for transmitting the driving force from the big winning opening solenoid 38b for driving the opening/closing member 990 is connected. ing. The drive arm 983 is positioned below the holding portion 982 . As shown in FIG. 24(b), the holding portion 982 is formed with a through portion 982a through which a connection pin 983a extending upward from the drive arm 983 can be inserted. 990 is connected to the connection portion 995 . 24 (
As shown in a), the holding portion 982 is formed with guide ribs 982b positioned on the left and right sides of the connecting portion 995 and extending along the front-rear direction. The guide rib 982b guides the opening/closing member 990 in the front-rear direction by guiding the connecting portion 995 in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 25, one end of the drive arm 983 is connected to a connecting member 984 connected to the big winning opening solenoid 38b. In addition, the drive arm 983 is provided with a rotating shaft 983b extending in the vertical direction, and is rotatable about the rotating shaft 983b. note that,
The rotating shaft 983b is sandwiched from the front and rear by the main body portion 970 and the rear wall member 960 and is rotatably held (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 25(a), when the special variable winning device 38 is closed, the drive shaft 38g of the big winning opening solenoid 38b is extended and the drive arm 983 is positioned at the front end of the rotation range. . In this state, the drive arm 983 is most rotated clockwise about the rotation shaft 983b as viewed from the back side, and the connection pin 983a is positioned at the front end of the movement range.

When opening the special variable winning device 38 from this state, the large winning opening solenoid 38b
By retracting the drive shaft 38g, the drive arm 983 rotates about the rotation shaft 983b in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the back side, and the connection pin 983a moves rearward to move the opening/closing member. Retract 990 rearward. As a result, the special variable winning device 38 is opened as shown in FIG. 25(b). When the special variable prize winning device 38 is to be closed, the operations described above are reversed.

26 to 29 show how game balls flow down in the special variable winning device 38. FIG. 28 and 29 are views in which a part of the front wall member 950 is seen through for explanation. The game ball that flows down the downflow path 38f from right to left first reaches the rear wall projecting portion 964 located on the most upstream side.
, and flows into the flow path forming portion 991 of the opening/closing member 990 . Then, the projection 99 of the opening/closing member 990 is guided obliquely rearward by the front wall projection 954 .
2 and flows obliquely rearward into the recess 993 . The game ball that has flowed into the recess 993 is
It is again guided diagonally forward by the downstream side surface of the recessed portion 993 formed obliquely toward the downstream side and the front wall projecting portion 954 adjacent to the downstream side.

Thereafter, the diagonally backward guidance by the front wall projecting portion 954 and the projecting portion 992 and the diagonally forward guidance by the recessed portion 993 and the rear wall projecting portion 964 are repeated, and the game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f meanders back and forth. It begins to flow down while As a result, the time of stay on the opening/closing member 990 becomes longer than when the liquid flows straight down without undulations such as the front wall projecting portion 954, the rear wall projecting portion 964, the projecting portion 992, and the recessed portion 993 in the flow passage 38f. It will happen. For this reason, FIG. 28 and FIG.
As shown in 9(a), the game ball is always present on the opening/closing member 990, and even if the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is short, when the opening/closing member 990 is opened, the state shown in FIG.
), there is a high possibility that the game ball existing on the opening/closing member 990 will fall and enter the big winning opening 38d, and even if the opening is short, the player will have a sense of expectation for winning. can be done. In addition, it is preferable to secure the time necessary for the game ball to stay on the opening and closing member 990 for the interval time to close the special variable winning device 38 before the round that is short open. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30(a), when the opening/closing member 990 is opened, the game ball staying on the opening/closing member 990 comes into contact with the projecting portion 992 formed on the opening/closing member 990. As shown in 30(b), it bounces and is guided in a direction away from the big winning opening 38d. Also, the bounced game ball may contact the front wall protruding portion 954 of the channel front wall 952, the rear wall protruding portion 964 of the channel rear wall 962, and the like, and may further move away from the big winning opening 38d. Also, the opening/closing member 990
Since the protruding portions 992 formed in are arranged at intervals through which the game balls can pass, the protruding portions 992 may pass through this interval and fall without coming into contact with the protruding portions 992 . In addition, the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 in the case of short opening, which will be described later, is the time during which even a game ball that bounces in contact with the projecting portion 992 or the like as described above can flow into the big winning opening 38d. ing. As a result, it is possible to flow into the big winning opening 38d even if the opening is short.

By providing the projecting portion 992, the front wall projecting portion 954, and the rear wall projecting portion 964 in this manner, the game ball rolls in a variety of ways when the opening/closing member 990 is opened, and the amusement of the game can be improved. . In addition, when the opening/closing member 990 is opened, the inflow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on the opening/closing member 990 into the large winning prize opening 38d can be shifted, and ball clogging occurs in the large winning prize opening 38d. can be prevented.

A front wall projection 954, a rear wall projection 964, and a projection 992 are provided as undulations in the downflow passage 38f.
, the concave portion 993 is provided, but other than this may be used. For example, meandering grooves may be formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 as undulations so that game balls flow down while meandering along the grooves. In addition, as undulations, rib-like projections and grooves are provided on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the flowing direction, and when the game ball flows down, it is moved vertically by the projections and grooves so that it flows down. You can do it.

From the above, the game board 30 having the game area 32 where the game ball can flow down is provided, and the start area provided in the game area 32 (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97) A game that executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of a game ball in 97), and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The machine is equipped with a special variable prize winning device 38 which can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes and an open state in which game balls can win prizes, and which is converted to the open state in a special game state, and the special variable prize winning device 38 is , a game ball can win a prize from an opening facing upward, and in a closed state, the opening is closed to prevent the game ball from winning a prize, and in an open state, the opening is opened to enable the game ball to win a prize. 990 is provided, and in the closed state, a game ball can flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990. Also, the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of game balls during the special game state, and to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, around the downflow path 38 f formed by the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 , the downflow path 38 f
A contact portion (front wall projecting portion 954, rear wall projecting portion 964) with which the game ball flowing down f can contact is provided. Therefore, by contacting the contact portion, the game balls remain on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 for a longer period of time, thereby suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls during the special game state and increasing the interest of the game. can.

In addition, in the closed state, the game ball is configured to flow down from one of the left and right ends of the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 to the other. It is formed so as to meander. Therefore, the opening/closing member 990
The time for which the game balls stay on the upper surface of the game ball becomes longer, the reduction of the game balls during the special game state can be suppressed, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

The special variable prize winning device 38 is opened and closed by the opening/closing member 990 that slides in the front-rear direction.
In the case of opening, it may be configured such that it rotates downward.

In addition, a game board 30 having a game area 32 in which game balls can flow down is provided, and a start area provided in the game area 32 (first start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97)
A game machine that executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information based on the winning of a game ball in a game ball, and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. , a special variable winning device 38 that can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot win a prize and an open state in which game balls can win a prize, and is converted to the open state in a special game state, and the special variable winning device 38 is positioned upward. A game ball can be won from the opening facing toward, and in the closed state, it protrudes forward and closes the opening to make it impossible to win a game ball, and in the open state, it retreats backward and opens the opening to release the game ball. An opening/closing member 990 that slides in the front-rear direction is provided so as to enable a prize to be won. 992, concave portion 993) are provided so that the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 990 longer than when there is no undulation, and the front end portion of the opening and closing member 990 has a An inclined surface 996 is formed such that the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction is reduced.

Therefore, the opening and closing member 990 is provided with undulations on the upper surface so that the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening and closing member for a longer time than when there is no such undulation. can be suppressed, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced. In addition, since the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990 is formed with an inclined surface 996 whose thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction is reduced toward the front end, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught when the member is closed.

Further, the upper surface of the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990 is a flat surface along the sliding direction, and the portion below the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being caught when closing, and by being guided downward by the inclined surface 996, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the game balls during the special game state, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit .

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer called an amusement chip (IC).
CPU) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operation clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, a reference clock for a random number generation circuit, and the like. DC32V, DC12V, D
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as C5V, is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-power supply that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V, DC 5V from a voltage of DC 32V, and the RAM inside the game microcomputer 111 During a power failure, the power supply voltage is supplied. Backup power supply unit 420 to supply
And, it has a power failure monitoring circuit, and includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 11 of the game control device 100
1 (especially built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 has a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time
M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as ROM 111B or RAM 11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means having a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached.
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed,
A display state in which a display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not have And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called all-rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. A display state in which at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same A state that has become identification information,
However, excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-win effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. The expected value is no reach < normal reach < special 1 reach < special 2 reach < special 3 reach <
It becomes higher in order of premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is lost). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random number generation for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining the variable display game execution time etc. in various reach and variable display without reach, hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game, etc. circuit, and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for giving update timing to the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (
Big hit or small hit) or loss), probability state of special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), normal fluctuation winning device 3 as the current game state
7 operation state (time-saving operation state (common electricity support state)), the number of start memories, etc., any one variation pattern table is selected and obtained from among a plurality of variation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table out of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby releasing the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, and a normal variable winning device 37.
Inside the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning port 97, the gate switch 34a in the normal starting gate 34, the winning port switch 35a, the special variable winning device 38
, and the high level supplied from these switches is 1
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided for inputting a negative logic signal such as 1V and a low level of 7V and converting it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Proximity I/F12
1, by setting the input range to 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch was improperly shorted, the sensor or switch was disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire was cut and left floating. Such an abnormal state can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, the proximity I/F1
21, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a and the big winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. be. Also, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121,
A detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 . Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like,
0, the detection signal of the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like, the game machine 10
A detection signal of a body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 or the like is also inputted. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is
0 to a trial-firing test apparatus (not shown) through a relay board 70. FIG.
Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
a, the detection signal of the starting port 3 switch 97a is configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. As shown in FIG.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is processed by the enable signal CE when the game microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changed to valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the input signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held at the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . The reset signal RESET is applied to each port 122, 123,
124 is not supplied. The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61 and board radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test firing test device, are temporarily taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, by the game machine controlling the game. The data bus 140 is supplied to the test-firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that it is not possible. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying the signal line of the detection signal of the switch without the buffer, and the like. ing. The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-firing apparatus.

The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the special variable winning device 38, and a movable member 37 of the normal variable winning device 37.
A second solenoid for outputting open/close data of the solenoid (universal solenoid) 37c for opening b.
An output port 134 is provided. The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 7 .
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to 1. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information on the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output section 130 is provided with a first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives open/close data signals of the big winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. , a second driver 1 for outputting ON/OFF drive signals for the segment lines on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135
38b, a third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138 d is provided for outputting an external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 .

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 450 . photocoupler 13
9 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 450 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 .
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sounds for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It has

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a memory content that can be stored even if power is not supplied at the time of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of holding data and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338, which constitutes timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the content of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decoration lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a working area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to inform the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait to inform that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
operates at DC5V, and since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the information display device 630. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 is provided for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15 . A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a board effect device 44 provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as the board effect device 44, the first lower movable members 740 and 741, the second
Lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 8
60, a first central movable effect member 900, a second central movable effect member 910, a third central movable effect member 920 and a fourth central movable effect member 930 are provided.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 detects the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on/off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 are detected. main control microcomputer 311
A switch input circuit 336 is provided for inputting a detection signal to.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. Furthermore, 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311
3.3V DC based on 5V DC when using a low voltage LSI such as
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the game machine 10
N45 is connected, and cooling FAN45 drives in the state where the power supply of production control device 300 was turned on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game ball (
A game is played by hitting a pachinko ball). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills placed in various places in the game area 32, and the normal figure start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 , 1st start winning port 36
Either the second start winning port 97, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38 is won, or it flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32.
When the game ball wins the general winning port 35, the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, the number corresponding to the type of the winning winning port Prize balls are discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from a payout unit controlled by a payout control device 200 (see FIG. 31).

A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 31) consisting of a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided in the normal pattern starting gate 34. When the game ball hit inside passes through the normal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. CPU 1 of game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
In 11A, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, if the normal pattern start memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), the normal pattern start memory number Add (+1) and store one normal map start memory in ROM 111B. The number of memory of this normal figure start winning prize is displayed on the normal figure reservation indicator of the collective display device 50. - 特許庁In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a. It is designed to be

Then, when there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern fluctuation display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not being executed, the normal pattern fluctuation display game wins and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If it is not in a winning state, the random value for winning determination stored in the first stored normal pattern start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Then, processing for starting the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100, as a process of executing the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern display device provided in the collective display device 50, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are determined in advance over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the normal pattern fluctuation display that is repeatedly displayed in the order shown, the process of displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game that stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. In addition, the display device 41 is used as the normal figure display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are used as the normal identification information. You can

When the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern of any one of the first winning stop pattern to the third winning stop pattern that makes a special result mode on the normal pattern display corresponding to the type of win is stopped. Along with the display, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated to control the movable member 37b of the ordinary variable winning device 37 to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is lost, control is performed to display a lighting pattern corresponding to the result mode of the normal pattern display on the normal pattern display.

In addition, the winning ball to the first start winning opening 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning opening 37 are respectively provided inside the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2
It is detected by the switch 37a and the starting port 3 switch 97a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning to the first start winning port 36 is set to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). In addition to storing the limit, the second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the second start winning port 97 or the normal variable winning device 37 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) memorize to Based on the winning to the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, and the normal variable winning device 37, a big hit random number value, a big winning pattern random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information, respectively. , and the extracted random number values are stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory and the second start memory. Then, the number of memories of this starting memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display and the special figure 2 reservation display of the collective display device 50, and also in the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decoration special figure start memory display Is displayed. Furthermore, the information display device 630
is also displayed.

Then, when the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game can be started, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The random number for judging the big hit is compared with the judging value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of judging the hit or miss of the special figure variation display game is performed. Furthermore, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed.

When executing the first special figure variation display game, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 1 indicator 51 (variation display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined variation time. After performing the display during the special figure 1 fluctuation, the process of displaying the first special figure fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. Also, when executing the second special figure variation display game, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 2 indicator 52 (variation display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined variation time. After performing the display during the special figure 2 fluctuation, the process of displaying the second special figure fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.

Also, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 (variation display device) and the information display device 630 correspond to the special figure variation display game, and a plurality of types of identification information (for example, (Numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are displayed in a variable display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, the game control device 100
Based on the control signal from, the setting of the production state, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b,
It performs processing such as controlling light emission of various LEDs. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

The decoration special symbol variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers etc. in the display device 41 is displayed in the left variation display area (first special symbol),
In each of the right variation display area (second special symbol) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed variation) at a speed at which identification is difficult. After a predetermined time, the changing symbols are sequentially stopped in the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs various presentation displays such as the appearance of a character to enhance interest. In addition, the decorative special figure variation display game on the information display device 630 blinks the light emitting member during the variation display, and when the stop time comes, the light emitting member is changed to a light emission mode (lighting, blinking, extinguishing) corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game. etc.). That is, the decorative special pattern (
4th pattern) to display the result mode.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 makes the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52 a special result mode or a small win result mode. A lighting pattern is displayed, and processing for generating a special game state or a small winning game state is performed. Moreover, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 or the information display device 630 corresponding to this is also the special result mode or the small hit result mode.

In the process of generating a special game state or a small winning game state, the C
The PU 111A, for example, opens the opening/closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and performs control to enable the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening. and,
The big winning hole is opened until either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole or a predetermined openable time elapses after opening the big winning hole. This is regarded as one round, and this is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (cycle game). That is, the game control device 100, when the stop result mode becomes a special result mode,
It constitutes a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52 is controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning results in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state, general-purpose high-probability state) as a game state after the special game state is finished based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is set to a high probability (normal pattern high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state). is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 per unit time is increased more than when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in this embodiment, the normal pattern probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal game state.

In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is, for example, 6
00 milliseconds, and when the normal fluctuation display game is a winning result and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal electric open time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500) of the first winning stop symbol
m seconds × 1 time), the opening time of the second hit stop pattern (electrical open time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 17
00 ms x 2 times), the opening time of the third hit stop pattern (electrical open time) and the number of open times (for example,
1700 ms×3 times).

In addition, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern stop time, the number of times the normal pattern is opened, and the normal pattern open time are set appropriately so as to control the normal pattern fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 to the time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game (
Normal figure fluctuation time) can be controlled to be a second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time (for example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal pattern stop time for displaying the results of the normal pattern fluctuation display game to be a second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms 704 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric open time) is set to the normal state (normal low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (e.g. 100 ms equals 1
352 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (the number of openings of the normal electric power) is set to the first number of openings (for example, 2 times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game.
It is possible to set the second number of times of opening to a greater number of times (for example, four times). In addition, in the time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the case of the normal operation state. It can be a probability (universal pattern high probability state, eg, 250/251).

In the time saving state, by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern open number of times, the normal pattern open time, and the normal pattern probability, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the open state. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. In addition, it is also possible to select either the first opening mode or the second opening mode when the win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Also, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be separate indicators or the same indicator, but each special figure fluctuation display so as not to be executed at the same time. A game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices and separate display areas for the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or the same display device and display area may be used. However, the decorative special figure variation display games are displayed independently and not simultaneously. Also, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. - 特許庁again,
In the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as special figure variation display games.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the starting port 3 in the second starting winning port 97 The switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning slot switch 35a, and the big winning slot switch 38a are provided with coils for detecting magnetic fields. type magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are
Microswitches with mechanical contacts can be used.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, first, a process of prohibiting interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, the start address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved is stored. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S
4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order, and 00h at the beginning is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a firing stop signal, the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

After that, the state of input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6),
Processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the subordinate control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instructions from the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting for normal startup. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122,
By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the initialization switch 11
2 operation can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. I have to keep doing it. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if you do not perform such a troublesome operation, it will be detected by performing an operation immediately after turning on the power, and the initialization operation performed when turning on the power It is possible to prevent a situation in which the

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed.
First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read through the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) to be checked is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. (step S9).

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S10;
N) returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Also, if the power failure monitoring signal has been turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits for the power to be cut off. in this way,
By determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. .

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the value of the timer is 0. is determined (step S12). If the timer value is not 0 (step S
12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). Moreover, when the value of the timer is 0 (step S
12; Y), that is, when the waiting time has ended, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (step S13), and off data is output to all output ports (output (step S14).

Next, the serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15), read first However, it is judged from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

If the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17). If so (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S
18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), checksum calculation processing is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM (step S19),
It is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power failure match (step S2
0). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), step S21 of FIG.
, and perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y),
If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17
; N or step S18; N), the checksum is not normal (step S20; N)
If it is determined as such, the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 34 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation section. form.

In step S21 of FIG. 34, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (
step S21). The areas to be initialized here are the blackout inspection area, the checksum area, and the area related to error monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indeterminate state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared and set to an indeterminate state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. After that, R
It is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state by examining the area for storing the game state in the WM (step S22). Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), skip steps S23 and S24 and proceed to step S25.
Also, if the special figure is in the high probability (step S22; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S2
5), go to step S31. In the case of this embodiment, in step S25, first, the model designation command is transmitted, and further special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, power failure recovery command, screen designation command (waiting for customers If so, send a plurality of commands such as the command for the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise the command for the recovery screen. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command or a high-probability number-of-times information command is also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are cleared. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is the production control board (production control device 300)
(step S30), and proceeds to step S31. In this embodiment, step S
In 30, first, a model designation command is transmitted, and further, a special figure 1 reservation number command, a special figure 2 reservation number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (display a customer waiting demo screen, and a predetermined time ( For example, for 30 seconds), a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization with light and sound) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command or a high-probability number-of-times information command is also transmitted. That is, in the case of power failure recovery and when the RAM is initialized, the model designation command is first transmitted to the effect control device 300, and this model designation command is effect control after the power of the game machine is turned on. This is the information that is first transmitted to the device 300 .

In step S31, a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator)
Perform processing to activate the circuit. Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC start-up process of step S31, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
done by A. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set.

After that, predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on
Extract the value of the corresponding various initial value random number (in the case of this embodiment, random number to determine the winning pattern of the special pattern (big hit pattern random number, small winning pattern random number), random number to determine the hit of the general pattern (hit random number ), the initial value (start value) of the random number (hit pattern random number) for determining the winning pattern of the normal pattern is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S33), and the interrupt is permitted (step S34).
Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number, the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the hit pattern random number are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. is configured as However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is faster than the operating clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same period as the timer interrupt process, which is a unit. In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the hit pattern random number, each time the random number goes around, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. ” is adopted. Each random number is +1 or -1
, or random update in which all the values within the range appear randomly without duplication until a cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, hit random number, and hit pattern random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and data bus.
is set (step S36), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S3
7). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the initial value random number update process (
Return to step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting by the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number updating process in step S35 may be performed in the main process as well as in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing, and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing.
This has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38).
. Then, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S3
8; N) returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitor signal is on (step S37). Further, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39
), a process of outputting OFF data to all output ports (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42).
Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step S43) for calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown of the RWM and processing for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step S45), it waits until the power supply of the game machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be determined when re-entering.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, , and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 35 shows checksum calculation processing (steps S19 and S4) in the main processing described above.
3) was shown. In this checksum calculation process, first, RW is used as the start value of the calculation address.
Set the top address of M (step S51) and set the number of repetitions (step S52)
, "0" is set as a calculated value (step S53). RA used for number of repetitions
The number of bytes of M is set.

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the contents of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S5).
4), the calculation address is updated by +1 (step S55), the repetition number is updated by -1 (step S56), and it is determined whether the checksum calculation is completed (step S57). If the calculation is not completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is finished (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process is finished.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 36 shows the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit design initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), and the small hit design initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62). Then, the winning initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), the winning design initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S64), and the initial value random number updating process is terminated.
Here, the "jackpot design initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the "small hit design initial value random number" is the small hit of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the stop symbol. In addition, "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game, "hit design initial value random number"
is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the winning and stopping pattern of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. In this way, by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main processing, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced.
It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not naturally exist in machines without a small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there are game machines that do not have winning symbol initial value random numbers.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, in the timer interrupt processing, the periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is sent to the CPU.
111A is started. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 37 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S1
01). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register saving process to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step S103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, output processing (step S104) for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) and the like is performed based on output data set in various processes. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step S105) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, random number update processing 1 (step S106),
Random number update processing 2 (step S107) is performed. After that, it is monitored whether normal signals are input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the normal gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a. Also, a winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S108) for monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) is performed. In addition, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing a process relating to a special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S110) for performing a process relating to a normal figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111) for driving the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired content (step S111), the magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring processing (step S112) for checking the detection signal from the board to determine if there is any abnormality, board radio wave fraud monitoring processing (step S112) for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is any abnormality Monitoring process (step S1
13). Then, the external information editing process (step S114) is performed to set the signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and the timer interrupt process ends.
Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require an instruction to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input processing (step S103) in the timer interrupt processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, in the input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S1).
21). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

Next, save the read state of input port 1 in switch control area 1 in RWM (
store) (step S123), prepare the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (step S124), and prepare the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM (step S125). After that, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126). is prepared (step S12
7), switch reading processing (step S128) is performed. Here, "preparation" in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but it is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130).
). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131). is prepared (step S132), switch reading processing (step S133) is performed, and the input processing ends.

Unused bit data and bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, although the unused bit data of input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of input port 3 prepared in step S131 are different data, they may have the same value. be.
Also, the bit data to be inverted for input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted for input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data.
As a result, the data may have the same value.

[Switch read processing]
Next, switch reading processing in the above-described input processing (steps S128, S133)
will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 39, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and after inverting the bit that needs to be reversed (step S143), the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is obtained. (step S144). After that, it waits until the delay time (for example, about 100 μs) until the second reading elapses (step S
145).

After the delay time has passed, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read for the second time (step S146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), and after inverting the bit that needs to be inverted (step S148), the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is changed. Save (store) to
(step S149). After that, the bit with the same state is set to 1 by the first and second reads.
, a definite bit pattern in which different bits are set to 0 (step S150), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken to obtain the current definite bit (step S15).
1).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which bits with the same state are set to 0 and bits with different states are set to 1 in the first and second readings (step S152). The product is taken and used as the previously held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to switch chattering or the like is removed. Then, the current defined bit and the previously held bit are synthesized and saved as the current defined state (step S154), and the exclusive OR of the previous and current defined states is taken and saved as a rising edge (step S155). , terminates the switch read process.

If the timer interrupt period is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is
There is a method of determining whether or not the signal has changed by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing it with the result of the previous reading. If the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost, there is a risk that correct judgment cannot be made. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing two switch read processes in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, it is possible to avoid the above problem.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the output process, first, OFF data is output (reset) to the output port 135 for outputting segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data output to the output port 134 that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c and the big winning opening solenoid 38b is synthesized and output (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated.
digit line output data is obtained (step S164). In this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 3. Next, the obtained data and the external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (eg, "door/frame open" data, "security signal" data) are sent to the output port for digit/external information output. 136
(step S166).
After that, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S168). In this embodiment, for example, various indicators provided in the collective display device 50, special figure 1 indicator 51, special figure 2 indicator 52, general figure indicator, special figure 1 reserved indicator, special figure 2 reserved Display, normal figure holding display, round display and second
To dynamically light up a game state display part.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S169), and the combined data (
For example, data of "jack signal 1", data of "jack signal 2", data of "jack signal 3", data of "jack signal 4", data of "symbol determination number signal", data of "start signal" , data of the "main prize ball signal") and the output data of launch permission are synthesized (step S1
70), and outputs the synthesized data to the output port 137 for outputting external information/fire enable signal (step S171). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (step S172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test-firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S173).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (step S174). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S175). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S176), the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing payout of prize balls to the payout control device 200. Winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the prize number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). This is an area to be used, and stores prize winning data corresponding to prize balls for which main prize ball signal generation processing has not been performed. That is, the prize number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout control device 200 also outputs a payout prize ball signal to the external device each time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By matching these two signals,
Unauthorized payouts can be monitored.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (in the case of this embodiment, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, and 14 winning balls). is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning to the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated with a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which it is sent. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, three winning ball counter areas of winning number counter area 1, 10
Up to 65,535 prizes can be stored in the individual prize ball counter area and the 14 prize ball counter area, respectively. Each sphere counter area is configured to be able to store up to 255 wins.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), the winning number counter area to be checked among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls is "0". Determine if there is a count number that is not If there is no count (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the count number of all winning number counter areas has been checked. Determine (step S183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. on the other hand,
If it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; N), step S
Returning to 181, the above processing is repeated. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

Also, in step S181, when it is determined that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184).
, acquire the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S18
5). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S187). As the value of the remaining number of prize balls area before this processing, a fractional number which is less than the predetermined number which is the reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). If not 0 or more (step S189; N), step S
192 processing. Also, if it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of output times of the main prize ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S191), and step S18
Return to the process of 8. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting to the outside of the gaming machine a main prize ball signal including information regarding the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as the game balls enter a predetermined prize area. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls is concentrated during a big win, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, and the accuracy of the prize ball signal generated during the big win is delayed. It is possible to prevent the problem that the number of winning balls cannot be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of output times of the main prize ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has reached "0" (step S1
93). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in a busy state (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. When the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is on (busy state). be done. In other words, the payout busy signal can also be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal serves as a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

When this payout busy signal indicates a busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. That is, in this embodiment, instead of transmitting a payout command for each timer interrupt, a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay out prize balls. It is configured to transmit a payout command when it is in the state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command is not performed, thereby avoiding unnecessary processing. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

Conditions for the payout busy signal to turn on (busy state) are, for example, during payout operation, during ball lending operation, during shot ball running out error, during overflow error, during frame radio wave fraud, payout ball detection switch (distributed ball detection switch) during abnormal payout error, during overpayment error, during payout control device 200, the number of prize balls to be paid out is counted in the memory of payout control device 200 (the number of prize balls that have not been paid out = the number of acquired game balls remaining). ) (when not = 0).

If the payout busy signal is not in a busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the win number counter area 1 (step S195). Winning number counter area 1
In the process of checking whether there is a count (step S195), among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, the winning number counter area to be checked has a count number other than "0". determine whether

If there is no count (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is determined whether the check of the count number of all winning number counter areas has been completed. Determine (step S197). In this judgment
When it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above processing is repeated. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

Also, in step S195, when it is determined that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198).
, acquires a payout number command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and is set to 200 milliseconds as an initial value, for example.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) is generated in units of winning one prize in the prize winning area, and is transmitted to the payout control device 200 . The payout control device 200 performs control to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. It constitutes a prize ball command transmission means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when it is.

In this way, the game control device 100 performs the control of transmitting the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, the data corresponding to winning prizes that have not yet been paid out are held on the game control device 100 side, so that they are backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and backed up by the payout control device 200.例文帳に追加Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for doing so.

[Random Number Update Processing 1]
FIG. 42 shows the random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small winning symbol random number, the winning random number, and the winning symbol random number which are targets of the initial value random number updating process.
In this random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for setting of the next initial value (start value) (step S211).
If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the small winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).
In addition, when the jackpot pattern random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot pattern initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot pattern random number corresponds. A register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the random number counter (random number area) is set (step S213). After that, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

If the small winning pattern random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the normal winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).
In addition, when the small-hit design random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the small-hit design initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial of the loaded small-hit design random number. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). After that, it is determined whether the random number for the normal pattern is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

If the normal pattern winning random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), it is determined whether the normal pattern winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220
). Also, if the normal pattern hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the next initial value of the loaded normal pattern hit random number The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219). After that, it is determined whether the winning pattern random number of the normal pattern is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220).
.

If the winning pattern random number for the normal pattern is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated. In addition, when the winning pattern random number of the general pattern is waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; Y), the winning pattern initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S221
), the random number counter (random number area) corresponding to the next initial value of the loaded normal pattern hit pattern random number
(step S22
2), the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random Number Update Processing 2]
FIG. 43 shows the random number update process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display games of special figure 1 and special figure 2. FIG. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and random number update processing 2 updates both. , and the update target is switched each time an interrupt occurs. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, update processing is performed at different interrupt times for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, 2
The update of the byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach fluctuation mode determination) is configured to be executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte.

In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S231). In this embodiment, the value of the random update scan counter is updated in the range of 0-3. Then, when the value of the random number update scan counter is "0", the variation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, and when it is "1", the variation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and "2
', the variation pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is '3', the variation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, the upper limit determination value of the random number is obtained from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit judgment value for each type of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random numbers have made a round.

Subsequently, for example, the CPU used as a game microcomputer in this embodiment includes D
A refresh register (hereafter referred to as "R register") used for RAM refresh, etc.
) is not provided, and instead a counter called "M1 counter" that operates in the same manner as the R register is incorporated, and the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be imparted to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, When updating the
It is set in the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower order of the M1 counter Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the value remaining after masking the upper 1 byte of the M1 counter value with a mask value (hereinafter referred to as this is called a "masked value") and "1" is added to the mask update value, the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as the addition value ( step S238), step S239
proceed to The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid the fact that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added afterward, the value before addition will not change. be.

Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ) and proceed to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value (1) of the random number area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. byte) is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S242, a value obtained by adding the additional value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether or not this new random value is greater than the upper limit judgment value acquired in step S233 (step S243). If the new random number value is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; N), the new random number value is saved in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245). If the new random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number is used as a new random number (step S244). byte random number or 2
The random number is saved in the random number area below the byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. Also, 2
If it is a byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random number (if a new random number is calculated again, that value) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number (step S24).
7), the random number update process 2 ends.
In the case of this embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated (1-byte random number, 2-byte random number (upper), 2-byte random number (lower)) are stored in the effect random number update table. , the address of the update area, etc. are defined for each type of random number to be updated (4 blocks).

Thus, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 variation display games. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting area of the start winning port 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for

[Winning gate switch/state monitoring process]
FIG. 44 shows the winning opening switch/state monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (step S1
08) was shown. In this winning hole switch/state monitoring process, first, a winning hole monitoring table corresponding to the big winning hole switch 38a in the big winning hole (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the big winning hole is open. A fraudulent and winning monitoring process (step S304) is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening and to detect a normal winning even though there is no illegal winning.

The winning opening monitoring table contains a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the fraud winning number area,
A fraudulent prize winning error notification command, a fraudulent winning number upper limit value (fraudulent occurrence determination number), a prize winning port switch table address, and notification timer update information (permission/update) are defined. In addition, the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches) is stored in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table
In addition, for each switch, the information of the monitor switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1, and the lower address of the winning number counter area 2 are defined. The winning hole monitor table is prepared for each switch to be monitored.

Next, a prize winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the general electrical system is prepared (step S305). (Step S306) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for winning opening switches (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that do not require fraud monitoring processing (step S307). Winning number counter update processing (step S308) for updating the number is performed.

Next, a state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals whose states are to be monitored and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In this embodiment, the state scan counter is updated from 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) is performed to determine the state such as whether an error has occurred.

In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is "0", the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, etc. State monitoring based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", state monitoring based on the shot ball cut switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is "2", the state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", the state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. be.

Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a game machine state check process (step S313) for determining the state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the game machine state monitoring table 2 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is "0", the glass frame open detection switch 63
State monitoring based on the signal output from the is set, and the value of the state scan counter is "1"
, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the body frame open detection switch 64 is set. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is "2", state monitoring based on the frame radio wave fraud signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S314), and if the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is executed. finish. In this case, there is no state to be monitored in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315).
), gaming machine state check processing (step S
316).

In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the game machine state monitoring table 3 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is "0", the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, etc. Two-signal based condition monitoring is set up. It should be noted that the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 does not define the state scan counter from "1" to "3".

After that, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is completed. Note that the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter, which is updated for each timer interrupt, is "0", so that it is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 milliseconds, the processing of steps S315 to S317 is performed every 16 milliseconds.

[Fraud & Winning Monitoring Process]
FIG. 45 shows fraud and winning monitoring processing (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring processing. This fraud & winning monitoring process includes the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 and the starting opening 2 switch 37 of the normal variable winning device 37.
This is the processing performed on a. With regard to the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) and general electrical (ordinary variable winning device 37), it is easy to forcibly open the opening and closing member, insert the game ball, and pay out the prize ball. In addition to monitoring fraud.

In this fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether or not it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S321).
step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during a special game state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be monitored for errors is the big winning opening switch 38a, and the winning opening switch to be monitored for errors is started. If it is the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is executed based on the hit of the normal figure.

Then, if it is the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S3
32). In addition, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings of interest is updated by +1 (step S324), and the number of fraudulent winnings after updating is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations to be monitored. It is determined whether there is (step S325).

In the case of this embodiment, regardless of the type of winning opening switch to be monitored for errors, the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations is set to 5, but the number of fraudulent occurrences is defined differently for each type of winning opening switch. can also The reason why the determination number is set to 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the game ball is caught in the valid period of the big winning opening switch. This is to avoid judging it as fraud when a prize is won past the time limit or when noise is superimposed on the signal, and to avoid simply judging an error even though it is not fraudulent.

Then, if the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the monitoring target fraud occurrence determination number (step S325
;N) prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (step S330)
. In addition, when the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations to be monitored (step S325;
Y) keeps the number of fraudulent winnings as the fraudulent occurrence judgment number (step S326), and saves the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area (step S327). Next, a target fraudulent occurrence command is prepared (step S328), a fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step S329), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step S338). ).

On the other hand, if it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330), and winning number counter update processing (step S331) for setting prize balls is executed. conduct. If the target notification timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step S332). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero. After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S333), and if the value is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the cheating & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S333; Y), i.e., if the time has expired or has already expired, the target unauthorized release command is prepared (step S333; Y).
334), prepare an illegal winning cancellation flag as an illegal flag (step S335). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).

If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraudulent & winning monitoring process this time, the target number of fraudulent winnings is cleared ( Step S337), the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (
step S338). Moreover, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S3
36; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer has become 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S
338; Y) terminates the illegality & winning monitoring process. If the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area do not match (step S338; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S339), and effect command setting processing is performed. (
Step S340), the cheating & winning monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the occurrence of an error, and an illegal winning error cancellation command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the cancellation of the error, and the start and end of the error notification are set. It will be done.

[Processing for updating winning number counter]
FIG. 46 shows winning number counter update processing (steps S308 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table (step S351), and it is checked whether there is an input (exactly, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch. Determine (step S352).

If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether or not all switches have been monitored (step S362). Also, if there is an input to the target winning entrance switch (
Step S352; Y) loads the value of target win number counter area 1 (step S3
53), update the loaded value by +1 (step S354), and determine whether overflow occurs (step S355). Then, if no overflow has occurred (step S
355; N) saves the updated value in winning number counter area 1 (step S356),
The value of target win number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). Also, if an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target win number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In the case of this embodiment, in step S354, the counter for prize balls (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (0 to 65
535 range).

After loading the target winning number counter area 2 value (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether or not there is an overflow (step S35).
9). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). , whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). Moreover, when an overflow occurs (step S35
9; Y) updates the table address to the address of the next record (step S361)
, whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). In the case of this embodiment,
In step S358, the counter for the main prize signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (ranging from 0 to 255).

If the monitoring of all switches has not been completed (step S362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352). Also, when the monitoring of all the switches is finished (step S362; Y), the win number counter update process is finished.
By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning to the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 47 shows gaming machine state check processing (
Steps S311, S313, S316) are shown. In this gaming machine state check process,
First, the state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is obtained (step S371).
, determines whether the signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table (gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the winning hole switch/state monitoring process). This information includes
For example, the lower address of the start address of the state monitoring area, the lower address of the port input state area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, the mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal, the signal ON determination data, State OFF command (forms error notification end command in error system), state ON command (forms error notification start command in error system), state OFF monitoring timer comparison value, state ON monitoring timer comparison value .

If the target signal is not ON (step S372; N), a state OFF flag is prepared as a state flag (step S373), and the target state OFF command is acquired and prepared (
step S374). After that, the target state OFF monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (step S
375), compare the value of the target signal control region with the current signal state (step S379)
. If the target signal is not ON (step S372; N), the error signal indicates that there is no error (normal), and the signal from the touch switch indicates that the touch switch is not touched. be.

On the other hand, if the target signal is ON (step S372; Y), a state ON flag is prepared as a state flag (step S376), and the target state ON command is acquired and prepared (step S377). After that, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (step S378), and the value of the target signal control region and the current signal state are compared (step S378).
79). If the target signal is ON (step S372; Y), it means that the signal of the error system indicates an error (abnormality or illegality), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is a state indicating

When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step S379; Y)
That is, if the state of the signal has not changed, update the target state monitoring timer by +1 (
Step S382), it is determined whether or not the value of the target status monitoring timer has become equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383). If the value of the target signal control region and the current signal state do not match (step S379; N), that is, if the signal state has changed, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control region ( step S380). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S381), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value ( step S383).

If the target state monitoring timer value is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N
) ends the gaming machine state check process. If the value of the target status monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the comparison value -1 (step S384). The obtained state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step S385).

Then, when the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and effect command setting processing is executed. (step S387), and ends the gaming machine state check process. As a result, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payment busy signal check processing]
FIG. 48 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the winning hole switch/state monitoring process described above. In this payout busy signal check process, first,
It is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

If the payout busy signal is on (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and the on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32
m seconds) (step S393), and it is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the current signal state (step S396). If the payout busy signal is not ON (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S391; N).
394), and sets the off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) (step S395).
, determines whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the current signal state (step S39).
6). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for multiple timer interrupts.

If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the current signal state (step S396; N
), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step S398), and the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399). If the value of the busy signal state area matches the current signal state (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400). End the payout busy signal check process. If the value is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the comparison value of -1 (step S401), prepared in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check process ends.

By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, and the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues for the signal determination time. etc.

In addition, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and becomes an indefinite state until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, even if the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. , and the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and immediately grasps that the payout process can be performed, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being broken.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special game process, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 3
7a, monitoring of the input of the starting port 3 switch 97a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the special game process, first, the start switch monitoring process (
Perform step A1). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the second starting winning opening 97, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are generated.
is extracted, and a game result preliminary determination is performed to determine in advance the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the winning.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A4). The value of the special game processing timer is "
0" (step A4; Y), i.e., if the time has expired or has already expired, register the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. (step A5), and acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special game process number using the table (step A6).
Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number (step A7).

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure variation are performed. A special figure normal process (step A8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "1", the setting of the special figure stop display time, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, etc. (Step A
9).

At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the kind of the big win and the big winning opening of each big win are performed. Special figure display process (step A10
)I do.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning gate, the update of the number of times of opening, and the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning gate are performed. A fanfare/interval process (step A11) is performed.
In step A7, when the special game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if it is the final round, the ending command is set, and the big winning opening remains. A large winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for ball processing is performed.

At step A7, if the special game process number is "5", if the big win round is the last round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged and the big win end process are performed. Large winning hole remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing
I do.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for carrying out the special figure normal processing is performed.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs are set, the fanfare command is set, and processing during the small win is performed. Processing (step A15) during a small winning fanfare for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
At step A7, if the special game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step A
16).
In step A7, if the special game processing number is "9", a process of setting a time for discharging the remaining balls that have won a prize in the big winning opening during the small winning middle process, or a small winning ending process. A small hit remaining ball process (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing is performed.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "10", small winning end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for carrying out special figure normal processing, etc. is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A
19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) relating to the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. and,
After preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A21), the symbol variation control process (step A22) relating to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed, and the special figure game process is completed. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processes are executed. conduct.

Incidentally, a small win is a result mode that does not involve the operation of a conditional device, and a big win is a special result that accompanies the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning device 38 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of, for example, winning a small prize lottery. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the startup switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hardware random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (starting port 1 switch 36a in this case), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and is sent to the target starting port. Set information indicating that a prize has been won. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize to the first start opening, which is the start opening of Toku-zu 1 (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning to the first starting port (step A103
In ;N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, if it is determined that there is a winning prize to the first starting port (step A
103; Y), it is determined whether or not it is during special working hours (during general electricity support) (step A
104).

At step A104, when it is determined that it is not in the special figure time saving (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A104, when it is determined that it is in the special figure time saving (step A104;
In Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. That is, if it is a time-saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting hole (first starting winning hole 36) is not won unless the player is left-handed, and the normal variable prize-winning device 37 is not won unless the player is right-handed. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but when there is a first start opening winning during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state) , a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing to hit to the right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step A107), special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) prepares a winning monitoring table (step A1
09), a hardware random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a in this case), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and is sent to the target starting port. Set information indicating that a prize has been won. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize to the second start opening which is the start opening of the special figure 2 (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning to the second starting port (step A111
In ;N), the process proceeds to step A116 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A111, if it is determined that there is a winning prize to the second starting port (step A
111; Y), the normal electric accessory (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is,
It is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (step A112), and when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is in operation (step A112; Y). , the process proceeds to step A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, step A
At 112, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether the normal electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

In step A113, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence judgments (eg, 5). The normal variable winning device 37
A game ball cannot win a prize in the closed state, and a game ball can win a prize only in the open state. Therefore,
If a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

In step A113, if it is determined that there is no electricity fraud (step A113; N
) prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A114), and after performing special figure starting port switch common processing (step A115), step A116 processing to proceed with further processing. Also, step A113
At step A1
16, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Next, prepare a winning monitoring table for the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) (step A11
6) Perform hard random number acquisition processing (step A117). In this hard random number acquisition process,
When there is an input to the target starting port switch (here, the starting port 3 switch 97a), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and it is determined that the target starting port has won. Set the information to be displayed. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize to the third start opening, which is the start opening of the special figure 2 (step A118).
If it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning to the third starting port (step A118
;N) terminates the starting port switch monitoring process.
On the other hand, in step A118, if it is determined that there is a winning prize to the third starting port (step A
118; Y), it is determined whether or not it is during special working hours (during general electricity support) (step A
119).

At step A119, when it is determined that it is not in the special figure time saving (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A119, when it is determined that it is in the special figure time saving (step A119;
In Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed. That is, if it is a time-saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, no prize is awarded to the third start port (second start prize port 97) unless the player is left-handed, and the normal variable prize-winning device 37 is not awarded unless the player is right-handed. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but when there is a third start opening winning during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state) , a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing to hit to the right.
Then, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) (step A122), special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A123) is performed, starting opening switch monitoring End the process.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, hardware random number acquisition processing (step A102
, A110, A117) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 51, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the first starting port (first starting winning port 36), the second starting port (normal variable winning device 3
7), and among the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), setting the non-winning information of the starting opening to be monitored (step A131), starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a,
and the starting port 3 switch 97a, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitoring target starting port switch (step A132).
If there is no input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A132; N), the hardware random number acquisition process is terminated.
On the other hand, if there is an input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A132; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A133), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the random number latch register to be monitored (step A134). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; Y)
loads the extracted jackpot random number into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepares (step A135). Then, among the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), and the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), the starting opening to be monitored wins Yes information is set (step A136), and the hard random number acquisition process ends.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps A108, A115, A123) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above will be described. Special figure starting mouth switch common processing, when there is an input of the starting mouth 1 switch 36a, the starting mouth 2 switch 37a, the starting mouth 3 switch 97a, is a process that is performed in common for each input.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the special figure starting opening switch common processing, first, starting opening 1 switch 36
a, the starter signal, which is the number of times information regarding the number of wins to the starter switch to be monitored among the starter 2 switch 37a and the starter 3 switch 97a is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 The output count is loaded (step A141), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A142), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A14).
3).
If the output count does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is set to RW
The data is saved in the starting port signal output count area of M (step A144), and the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A143; Y), step A1
45 is processed. In this embodiment, "0" to "255"
” can be stored. When the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of output times overflows, and the data is not saved.

Next, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97
Among a, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure pending (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit (step A145).
When the special figure reservation number to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A145; N), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated.
Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A145; Y), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) is updated by +1 ( Step A14
6), prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (step A147), perform the production command setting process (step A148), and set the target starting opening winning flag Save (step A149). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step A150)
, The jackpot random numbers prepared in the hardware random number acquisition processing of steps A102, A110, and A117 are saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step A151). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A152), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A153). This jackpot symbol random number is used in the special figure reservation information determination process (step A160).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in this embodiment) are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step A154). and the first
It is determined whether or not it is a prize to the starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step A155). In step A155, when it is determined that the first start opening is not winning (step A155; N)
, the process proceeds to step A158. On the other hand, in step A155, when it is determined that the winning to the first starting port (step A155; Y), to extract a small hit pattern random number,
It is prepared (step A156) and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A157). In step A158, the address of the variation order flag storage area corresponding to the sum of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number (any place from 1 to 8) is calculated (step A158), the calculated area Save the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) variation order flag (step A159), perform special figure reservation information determination processing (step A160), and end the special figure start opening switch common processing.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the starting winning areas of the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the normal variable winning opening 37. It constitutes a start memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory which is the execution right of the variable display game. In addition, the starting storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port 36, which is the starting port of the special figure 1, to the first Stored as a start memory, various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning port 97 or the normal variable winning device 37, which is the starting port of the special figure 2, are set to the second start with a predetermined number as the upper limit Store as memory.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, the special figure holding information determination process (step A
160) will be described in detail. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 53, first, a big-hit determination process (step A161) is performed to determine whether or not the game is a big-hit according to whether or not the big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. If the determination result is a big hit (step A162; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starting switch is set (step A163), and the big hit pattern random number prepared in step A152 is checked. Stop symbol information is acquired (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A171.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A162; N), it is determined whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is won (step A165).
In step A165, if it is determined that the first start opening is not winning (step A165
In ;N), setting stop pattern information of the lost (step A170), step A171
to process.
On the other hand, in step A165, if it is determined that the first start opening is won (step A
In 165; Y), a small hit determination process (step A166) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value. Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A167; N), set the stop symbol information of the loss (step A
170), the process proceeds to step A171.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A167; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A168), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A156 is displayed. Obtained (step A169), and proceeds to the process of step A171.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A171), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A172). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A173) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A174).

After that, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A175), and perform the production command setting process. (Step A176), end the special figure reservation information determination process. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A173 and the variation pattern setting process in step A174 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the look-ahead pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead object and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. and transmitted to the effect control device 300 . As a result, the judgment result (read-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to inform the device 300, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., to the player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result will be obtained). etc.) constitutes prior determination means. The timing for determining the random value stored corresponding to the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Large winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the big winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special game processing number is "4", that is, whether the big winning opening opening process is in progress (step A201). . If the big winning opening is being processed (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. In addition, if the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is not being performed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special game processing number is "5", that is, whether the remaining ball processing for the large winning opening is being performed (step A201; N) A202).

If the big winning hole remaining balls are being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Also, if the big winning hole remaining balls are not being processed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special game processing number is "8", that is, whether the small winning process is being performed (step A203 ). If it is during the small hit process (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. In addition, if not during small hit processing (step A203
;N) determines whether the value of the special game processing number is "9", that is, whether the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204). Since the special game processing number does not move to the next until the special game processing timer reaches "0", the progress of the game can be checked by the special game processing number in this way.

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A204; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated. Further, when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Then, the winning counter is set to "0" (step A205), and it is determined whether there is an input to the big winning opening switch (step A206).

If there is no input to the big winning opening switch (step A206; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). Also, if there is an input to the big winning slot switch (step A206; Y), prepare a big winning slot count command (step A207
), effect command setting processing (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A21).
4).

When it is determined whether the winning counter value is "0" (step A214), if the winning counter value is "0" (step A214; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
If the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the big winning hole remaining balls are being processed (step A215).
When the big winning opening remaining balls are being processed (step A215; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is finished, and when the big winning opening remaining balls are not being processed (step A215; N), the small winning opening remaining balls are processed. It is determined whether it is in the middle (step A216).
If the remaining small hit balls are being processed (step A216; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. It is added to the mouth count (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the big winning mouth count exceeds the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, "9") (step A218).

If the number of large winning opening counts is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the number of large winning opening counts is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the number of large winning opening counts is kept at the upper limit (step A219
), the special game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A220), and it is determined whether or not processing is in progress (step A221). If not during small hit processing (step A221
;N) is when the big winning opening switch monitoring process is completed and the process is in progress (step A
221; Y) saves the value for ending the small winning opening operation in the big winning opening control pointer area (step A222), and ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process. As a result, the big winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the special figure game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are both "0" (step A301).
In step A301, when it is determined that both the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are not "0" (step A301; N), the flag is loaded from the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total number of reservations 1) Then (step A302), it is determined whether this change is the change of special figure 1 (step A303).
In step A303, if it is determined that the current variation is the variation of special figure 1 (step A3
03; Y), prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (step A
304), effect command setting processing (step A305) is performed, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A306) is performed, and special figure normal processing is terminated. It should be noted that, at this point, the special figure 1 reservation number is not updated by -1, but in step A304, prepare a command (decorative special figure reservation number command) corresponding to the -1 updated value.

On the other hand, in step A303, if it is determined that this variation is not the variation of special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, if this variation is the variation of special figure 2, it corresponds to the number of special figures 2 pending Prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command (step A307), perform the effect command setting process (step A308), perform the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309), and end the special figure normal process. It should be noted that at this point, the number of special figures 2 pending -1 is not updated, but in step A307, the command corresponding to the -1 updated value (decoration special figure pending number command)
to prepare.

Also, in step A301, when it is determined that both the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started ( Step A310), if the customer waiting demonstration has not started yet (step A310; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A311).
Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A312), and effect command setting processing (step A313) is performed.
Next, set "0" for special figure normal processing as the processing number (step A314),
The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A315), and the variable design discrimination flag area is cleared (step A316). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A306) in the special figure normal processing described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 56, first, the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1
) to save the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag area (step A321),
A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed for setting deviation information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a jackpot.

Next, special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A
323) is performed, a special figure information setting process (step A324) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and various kinds of setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game are performed. Prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set (step A325). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.
Then, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A328)
, the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A329).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal relating to the start of variation of special symbol 1 (for example, a special symbol 1 varying signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), flashing control timer in the special figure 1 flashing control timer area (special figure 1 indicator 5
Save the initial value (for example, 52 msec) of the timer for the flashing cycle of 1 (step A333
), save the initial value (for example, 0) in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (step A334)
, To end the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A309) in the above-mentioned special figure usual processing will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 56 is performed for the second start memory. It is done as

As shown in FIG. 57, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second
A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed for setting deviation information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a jackpot.

Next, special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step A
343) is performed, a special figure information setting process (step A344) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and various kinds of setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game Prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set (step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.
Then, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A348)
, the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A349).

Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (for example, the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), blinking control timer in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (special figure 2 indicator 5
2 flashing cycle timer) save the initial value (for example, 104 msec) (step A35
3), save the initial value (for example, 0) in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (step A354
), to end the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In FIG. 58, the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A
322) was shown. In this big-hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small-hit flag area (step A361), and deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 1 area (step A362). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1), prepare (step A363), the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (
1) is cleared to 0 (step A364). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1). After that, a big-hit determination process (step A365) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit depending on whether the prepared big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A365) is a big hit (step A366; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the losing information is saved in step A362 (step A367 ), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A365) is not a big hit (step A366; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number matches the small hit determination value is a small hit or not. A small hit determination process (step A368) for determining is performed.

Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is a small hit (step A369; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area where the loss information is saved in step A361. (Step A370), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is not a small hit (step A369; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the loss information in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. Thus, in this embodiment, the first
The result of the special figure variation display game is one of "big win", "minor win", and "lose".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In FIG. 59, the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A
342) was shown. In this big-hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, RWM's special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (
Load the jackpot random number from (for reservation number 1), prepare (step A372), and clear the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for reservation number 1) to 0 (step A372). In addition, the number of reservations is 1
What is used is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory where the digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2). After that, big hit determination processing (step A374) for determining whether or not the big hit is a big hit according to whether or not the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.
I do.

Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is a big hit (step A375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A371 (step A375 ), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is not a big hit (step A375; N), the big hit flag 2 while saving the deviation information in the big hit flag 2
End the setting process. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is either "big hit" or "loss".

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 60 shows the jackpot determination processing (steps A161, A365, A374) in the above-described special figure reservation information determination processing, jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing. In this big hit determination process, first, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step A38
1), it is determined whether the target jackpot random number value is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), set a loss as the judgment result (step A387), and end the jackpot judgment processing. Specifically, the big-hit determination process is the big-hit determination process in the big-hit flag 1 setting process (step A36
5), if the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382;
Y) is a small hit or a loss, so "other than a big hit (small hit or loss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), it is a loss. Therefore, "other than big win (lost)" is set as the determination result (step A387).
Also, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; N), it is judged whether or not it is in a high probability state (step A383).

And, if the high probability state (step A383; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability (step A384), determine whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386 ). Also, if it is not a high probability state (step A383; N), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability (step A385), and determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386) .

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; Y), the judgment result is set to be lost (step A357), and the jackpot judgment processing is terminated. Specifically, the big-hit determination process is the big-hit determination process in the big-hit flag 1 setting process (step A36
5), if the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386;
Y) is a small hit or a loss, so "other than a big hit (small hit or loss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, and if the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), it is a loss. , "Other than a big hit (lost)" is set as a judgment result (step A387).
If the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; N), that is, if the game is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step A388), and the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Small hit determination process]
FIG. 61 shows the small hit determination process (steps A166, A368) in the special figure reservation information determination process and the big hit flag 1 setting process described above. In this small hit determination process, first, set the small hit lower limit judgment value, determine whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (
Step A391). In addition, the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination is used to perform the small hit determination. That is, the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value.
The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value are set so as not to overlap each other.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; Y), that is, if it is a loss, the judgment result is set to be a loss (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.
Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), set the small hit upper limit judgment value, and determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value. (Step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is a loss, the judgment result is set to be a loss (step A393), and the small hit judgment process is terminated.
Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; N
), that is, if it is a small hit, set a small hit as the judgment result (step A394)
, ends the small hit determination process.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
In FIG. 62, the special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A
323) was shown. In this special figure 1 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), special figure 1
Load the jackpot pattern random number from the jackpot pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A4
02). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (step A403), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired, and saved in a special figure 1 stop design number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop design information table is set (step A405), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A406). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407), the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired, and the probability fluctuation judgment is made. It saves in the data area (step A408), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (step A409).

These pieces of information are for setting the mode of execution of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. In the case of this embodiment, the performance mode shifts with a hit as a trigger, and the shift destination of the performance mode after the end of the winning changes according to the type of the winning pattern (the type of the big winning pattern or the small winning pattern). In addition, among the jackpots in special figure 1, a specific jackpot pattern (for example, 4
In the case of R probability variation pattern), depending on whether the game state is in probability variation, it is difficult to distinguish whether the production mode of the transition destination is a dedicated production mode in which probability variation is confirmed, or whether it is probability variation. It is determined whether to shift to a special production mode. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and if it is a small hit (step A411; Y).
loads the small hit design random number from the special figure 1 small hit design random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step A411). Next, a special figure 1 small hit design table is set (step A412), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired, and saved in a special figure 1 stop design number area (step A413).
After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

Also, if the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop pattern number area (step A416), and the losing stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area. Save (step A417) and prepare a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, save the decoration special figure command in the decoration special figure command area (step A419),
Effect command setting processing (step A420) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422), and the special figure 1 The small hit symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
In FIG. 63, the special figure 2 stop design setting process (step A
343) was shown. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2
Load the jackpot pattern random number from the jackpot pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A4
32). Next, a special figure 2 jackpot design table is set (step A433), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired, and saved in a special figure 2 stop design number area (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step A435), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A436). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 2 display device 52) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability fluctuation judgment is performed. It is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the mode of execution of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A431; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern number area (step A440), and the losing stop pattern pattern is saved in the stop pattern pattern area. Then (step A441), a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, save the decoration special figure command in the decoration special figure command area (step A443),
Effect command setting processing (step A444) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446), and the special figure 2 End the stop symbol setting process.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball in the first start winning port (start winning port 36), and the second starting winning port (normal variable winning port). It constitutes a variable display game executing means for executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of a game ball by the device 37). In addition, the game control device 100 determines the determination means (
It constitutes variable display game execution control means for controlling execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (steps A173, A324, A344) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process, special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. In the case of this embodiment, the probability state (low/high probability, with/without time saving) does not affect the distribution of fluctuations, but the production mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. The production mode is based on the probability state, the presence or absence of a time saving state, the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game, etc.
One production mode is set from a plurality of production modes.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).
Next, set the first half fluctuation group selection offset table (step A453),
Acquire the offset data corresponding to the target special figure pending number and the stop design pattern (step A454).
Next, the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A4
55), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the fluctuation apportionment information 1 area (step A456). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of loss, so in cases other than loss, the number of holds does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. A variation group includes multiple variation patterns, and when determining a variation pattern, first select a variation group, and then select one variation pattern from this variation group. ing.

Next, the second half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the second half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).
.
Next, set the second half fluctuation group selection offset table (step A459),
Acquire the offset data corresponding to the target special figure pending number and the stop symbol pattern (step A460).
Next, the second half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A4
61), save the value obtained by addition in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and end the special figure information setting process. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area, the fluctuation distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, only in the case of loss, the rate of reach changes according to the number of holds (the rate of reach is lower when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than losses, the number of holds is distributed in the second half as a result. does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing, special figure 1 variation start processing, and variation pattern setting processing (steps A174, A326, A346) in the special figure 2 variation start will be described. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation, which is the fluctuation form from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group selection address table is set (step A471), the address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), load the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the reserved number 1) and prepare (step A473)
. In this embodiment, the structure of the second half variation group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the size is 1 byte for winning, and 2 bytes for losing. Since the probability of winning is lower than the probability of losing, and even 1 byte is sufficient, the size of the winning is 1 byte from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used at the time of winning. In addition, since the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning, and it is desired to produce more diverse effects, the size of the losing is 2 bytes.

Then, it is determined whether the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost (step A474),
If it is a miss (step A474; Y), 2-byte allocation processing (step A4
75) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A477. If it is not lost (step A474; N), sorting processing (step A476) is performed and step A477 is performed.
to process.

Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is obtained and prepared (step A477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the reserved number 1), Prepare (step A478). Then, the allocation process (step A479) is performed, and the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (step A480). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, a first half fluctuation group table is set (step A481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the reserved number 1)
is loaded and prepared (step A484). Thereafter, distribution processing (step A485
), acquire the first half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation, save it in the first half variation number area (step A486), and terminate the variation pattern setting process. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set.
That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[Distribution process]
FIG. 66 shows the sorting process (step A476,
A479, A485). In the distribution process, based on the variation pattern random number 1, the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game is selected from the second half variation group table, and based on the variation pattern random number 2, the special figure variation display game is selected from the second half variation selection table. Select the second half variation pattern (second half variation number), or select the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation selection table based on the variation pattern random number 3. be.

In this sorting process, first, the head data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table prepared in step A472, second half fluctuation selection table prepared in step A477, or first half fluctuation selection table prepared in step A483) is a code for no sorting (that is, "0") (step A2201). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are at least one of the latter half fluctuation selection table, the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (
However, in the case of a selection table that does not require sorting, the sorting value "0", i.e., no sorting code, is specified at the top.

Then, if the top data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, or first half fluctuation selection table) is a code without sorting (step A2
202; Y) is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result (step A2
207), the sorting process ends.
On the other hand, if the head data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, or first half fluctuation selection table) is not a code without sorting (step A22
02; N) acquires one sorting value initially defined in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) (step A2203).

Subsequently, the distribution value obtained in step A2203 is subtracted from the random values prepared in steps A473, A478, and A484 (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, and variation pattern random number 3) to obtain new random values. is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205). Then, if the new random number is not smaller than "0" (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203, and the subsequent process.

That is, the distribution values specified next in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) are acquired (step A2203
), after that, a new random number is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random number determined in the previous step A2205 (step A2204), and the new calculated random number is "0".
is smaller than (step A2205).
The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y). As a result, at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), or first half fluctuation pattern (first half Any one of the second half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) is selected from among the fluctuation numbers).
Then, in step A2205, if it is determined that the new random number is smaller than "0" (
Step A2205; Y), update to the address of the data corresponding to the result of sorting (step A2207), and end the sorting process.

[2-byte distribution processing]
FIG. 67 shows the 2-byte allocation process (step A
475) was shown. The 2-byte allocation process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte allocation process, first, the data at the beginning of the selection table (second half fluctuation group table prepared in step A472) is a code without allocation (that is, "0").
is checked (step A2301). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, but the latter half defines only the second half fluctuation selection table in which the second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach" Since there is no need for sorting in the variation group table (for example, some variation group tables when the result is a loss), a sorting value of "0", that is, a code indicating no sorting, is defined at the top. .

Then, if the top data of the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is a code without sorting (step A2302; Y), update to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step A2307), 2 bytes End the sorting process.
On the other hand, if the head data of the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is not a code without sorting (step A2302; N), one sorting value specified first in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is acquired. (Step A2303).

Subsequently, the distribution value obtained in step A2303 is subtracted from the random value prepared in step A473 (value of variation pattern random number 1) to calculate a new random value (step A23
04), it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A23
05). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2305; N
) is updated to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), then step A23
03, and the subsequent processes are performed.
That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is acquired (step A2303), and then a new distribution value is subtracted from the random value determined in the previous step A2305. Calculate a random number (step A2304)
, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305).
.

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y). As a result, any one of the second half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection tables (second half fluctuation group tables).
Then, in step A2305, if it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (
Step A2305; Y), update to the address of the data corresponding to the result of allocation (step A2307), and terminate the 2-byte allocation process.
The configuration of the allocation process shown in FIG. 66 and the configuration of the 2-byte allocation process shown in FIG.
Although they are basically the same, the difference is whether the size of the random number used for sorting is 1 byte or 2 bytes, so the program instructions for calculation are different.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A327, A347) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 68, in the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area for the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492),
A first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half variable time value and the second half variable time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). After that, prepare a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (step A498), prepare a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (step A499), and perform effect command setting processing (
Step A500). Next, update the number of special figures reserved corresponding to the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag by -1 (
Step A501), set the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step A504). Furthermore, the variable order flag storage area is shifted (step A505), the free area after the shift is cleared (step A506),
The fluctuation start information setting process is ended.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. i.e.
The game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game A variation command containing information about a pattern and a stop information command containing information about extension of stop time are mentioned, and a command is transmitted to production control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the special figure fluctuation processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is prepared (step A601), and effect command setting processing (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In this embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a winning symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 milliseconds, and when the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 2000 milliseconds, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small winning symbol pattern, the display time is set to 2000 milliseconds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, set "2" for special figure display processing as the processing number (step A605)
, save the process number in the special game process number area (step A606). moreover,
Signals related to the end of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, signal OFF during special symbol 1 fluctuation) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), Signals related to the end of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, during special symbol 2 fluctuation signal OFF) in the test signal output data area (Step A
608), save the control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in the pattern determination number signal control timer area related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for output to the external information terminal (step A)
609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 indicator 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A610 ), as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A611), end the processing during special figure fluctuation.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the special figure displaying process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM Processing (step A702) for clearing the small hit flag area is performed.
Then, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), processing (step A704) of clearing the RWM jackpot flag 1 area and jackpot flag 2 area. Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705), and it is a jackpot (step A70).
5; Y), a test signal related to the start of the second special figure variation display game jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot)
Special symbol 2 hit signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A708), and the round number upper limit table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, in step A705, as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (
Step A706), when it is determined to be a big hit (step A706; Y), a test signal (for example, a condition device in operation signal is ON, an accessory Turn on the signal during continuous operation device operation, turn on the signal per special symbol) to RW
The data is saved in the test signal output data area of M (step A707), and processing for setting the round number upper limit table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained, and the RWM is saved in the round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM round LE
Save in the D pointer area (step A711).

Next, the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of RWM, prepared (step A712), and the production command setting process (step A71
3). After that, prepare a probability information command related to the information to set the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A714), production command setting processing (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, the design information set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop design setting process (stop design number or stop design pattern)
A fanfare command corresponding to is prepared (step A716), and effect command setting processing (step A717) is performed.

Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of this embodiment, in step A718, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when there is a jackpot with balls (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1 (4R probability variation (quick accuracy))), and the jackpot with no balls (big prize jack The opening information is the big winning opening information 1 (
In the case of 4R probability variation (rapid probability)), it is ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it is OFF otherwise. In addition, the big win 3 signal is ON when the big win with the paid out balls is made, and is turned OFF when the big win is made without the paid out balls.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 milliseconds, 470
0 msec, 7700 msec or 300 msec) is set (step A719), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A720).
Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A721). This stores the information of the probability state of the special figure and the time saving state when the special result occurs. Then, based on the information stored later, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined.

Then, the large winning slot fraudulent winning number area of the big winning slot (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the big winning slot opening information is cleared (step A722), and the big winning slot corresponding to the big winning slot opening information is cleared. Save the outside fraud monitoring period flag in the fraud monitoring period flag area (step A72).
3). Thereafter, fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724
) to end the special figure display process. That is, the game control device 100 converts the special variable winning device 38 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It constitutes special game state generating means for generating a state.

On the other hand, in step A706, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A706
;N) determines whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined that the small hit flag is a small hit in step A725 (step A72
5; In Y), time reduction variation number update processing (step A726), presentation mode information check processing (step A727) regarding the setting of the presentation mode are performed, and the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state. is determined (step A728).

At step A728, if it is determined that the special figure is not in the high probability (step A728; N
), load the decorative special command from the decorative special command area and prepare it (step A
729), effect command setting processing (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), and effect command setting processing (step A73
2) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
Also, in step A728, when it is determined that the special figure is in the high probability (step A72
At 8;Y), the process proceeds to step A733. Thus, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment
At 0, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the occurrence of a small win opens the big winning opening, but in order not to make the player aware of the occurrence of a small win, The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A733). After that, the process transition setting process 1 (step A734) during small hit fanfare is performed, and the process during special figure display is completed.

On the other hand, in step A725, when it is determined that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the time reduction fluctuation number update process (step A735), the production mode information check process regarding the setting of the production mode (step A736) is performed, the switching preparation remaining rotation speed corresponding to the production mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether the production remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A738). In addition, the switching preparation remaining number of rotations may be a different value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes, or may be the same value in any one of the plurality of presentation modes. (number of rotations), or may be the same value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes.
At step A738, if it is determined that the number of rotations remaining for production and the number of rotations remaining for switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), special figure normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step A741
) to end the special figure display process.
On the other hand, in step A738, if it is determined that the number of rotations remaining in the production and the number of rotations in preparation for switching match (step A738; Y), the production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the production command is set. After performing the processing (step A740), the special figure normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and the processing during special figure display is completed. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for not performing a look-ahead production from several rotations before the production mode switches, and by transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, the production is performed across the modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction etc. from occurring in

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, time reduction variation number update processing (step A726,
A735) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 72, in the time reduction variation number update process, first, it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (during the high probability state) (step A751). If it is in the special figure high probability (step A751; Y), the time shortening fluctuation frequency update process is terminated. Also, if it is not in the special figure high probability (step A751; N), it is determined whether it is in the time saving (step A752). And when it is not in time reduction (step A752; N), the time reduction variation frequency update process is terminated. Also, if it is in the time saving (step A752; Y)
updates the number of time reduction fluctuations by -1 (step A753), and the number of time reduction fluctuations is "0"
(step A754).

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A754; N), the time reduction fluctuation number updating process is terminated. In addition, when the number of time reduction fluctuations is "0" (step A75
In 4; Y), a signal relating to the time-saving end (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area. Then, a signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF) to the test signal output data area Save.

Next, save the number without time saving in the game state display number area (step A757), save the general figure low probability flag in the general figure game mode flag area (step A758), special figure in the special figure game mode flag area Save the low probability & no time saving flag (step A759
). Next, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display section 57) is displayed. In order to turn off the light, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the time reduction variation count update process is terminated.

[Production mode information check process]
Next, production mode information check processing in the above-mentioned special figure display processing (step A727
, A736) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 73, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is the no-update code (step A77).
1). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), the presentation mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game has been executed, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state. .

Also, if the next mode transition information is not an update no code (step A771; N), the effect remaining rotation number, which is the number of executable times of the special figure variation display game until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A772). , determines whether the number of rotations remaining for the effect has become "0" (step A
773). If the number of rotations remaining for the effect is not "0" (step A773; N),
The production mode information check process is terminated. Also, if the number of rotations remaining for production becomes "0" (
Step A773; Y), that is, when changing the production mode from the next special figure variation display game, set the production mode information address table (step A774), and acquire the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information ( Step A775).

Then, the production mode number of the production mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the production mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the production remaining rotation number of the production mode to be transferred is acquired,
It saves in the effect remaining rotation speed area in RWM (step A677), acquires the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted, and saves it in the next mode transition information area in RWM (step A678). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set production mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780; Y), that is, if the probability state has not changed, the presentation mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area for restoration from power failure (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area for restoration from power failure (step A782), Effect command setting processing (step A782) is performed.
Next, prepare a production rotation number command corresponding to the newly set production remaining rotation number (
Step A783), effect command setting processing (step A784) is performed.
Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared (step A785), and effect command setting processing (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new production mode is a left-handed mode (step A787)
If it is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. Also, if the mode is left-handed (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), production command setting processing (step A789) is performed, and production mode information check processing is completed. do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that gives notice of the switching from before the specified number of rotations before switching the effect mode. By managing the performance mode by the game control device 100 in this way, control such as generating a specific reach only in a specific performance mode, for example, can be performed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process 1 (step A724) during fanfare/interval in the process during special figure display described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1, first, "3", which is the process number related to the fanfare/interval process, is set (step A791), and processed in the special game process number area. Save the number (step A792).

Next, a signal relating to the start of the big win (special game state) (for example, turning on the big win 1 signal (output with the big win + small win), turning on the big win 4 signal (output with the big win)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), a signal regarding the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1
OFF the fluctuation time reduction state signal, special pattern 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF, normal design 1
High probability state signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794)
. In addition, even in the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes in the general figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF. After that, clear the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state (step A
795), save the number without time saving in the game state display number area (step A796),
The general pattern low probability flag is saved in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A797).

Then, to clear the variable symbol discrimination flag area (step A798), high probability notification flag area in order to turn off the game state display LED (third game state display unit) provided on the game board 30 associated with the display of the high probability state is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, save the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), special figure fluctuation display that can be executed in the time saving state A time-reduction variation count area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state end, and the normal probability state and normal state occur.

After that, save the number of the production mode 1 in the production mode number area (step A803),
The effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, a signal (for example, turning on the firing position designation signal 1) relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806).
), in order to light up the right-handed display LED (for example, the second game state display section), save the right-handed number in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and perform fanfare/interval processing. Terminate the migration setting process 1. As a result, the information of the effect mode is once cleared along with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the processing transition setting processing 1 (step A734) during small hit fanfare in the processing during special figure display described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 75, in the small-hit fanfare middle process transition setting process 1, first, "7" for the small-hit fanfare middle process is set as the processing number (step A811),
The processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (step A812).

Next, a small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, a big win 1 signal is turned ON (output with big hit + small win) )) in the external information output data area (Step A
814), a signal relating to the start of the small winning game (for example, a special symbol 1 small winning signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815).

Next, the area for the number of fraudulent prize winnings is cleared (step A816), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flag area for fraudulent monitoring period for major winning openings (step A817).
Next, a signal relating to the right-handed instruction (turning on the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818), and the right-handed display LED (eg, the first game state display section 57) is lit. Therefore, the number in the right hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the process transition setting process 1 during small win fanfare is completed.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare/interval process (step A11) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the fanfare/interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A902). , effect command setting processing (step A903) is performed.

After that, a large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an open switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special game state is the acquired open switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
If the number of rounds is greater than the open switching judgment value (step A906; Y), short open (
2nd opening mode) for large winning opening opening time (for example 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A907), processing transition setting processing during large winning opening opening (step A909)
to terminate the fanfare/interval process.
Also, if the number of rounds is not greater than the open switching determination value (step A906; N), the large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening (first opening mode) is set in the special game processing timer area. Save (step A908), processing transition setting processing during the opening of the big winning opening (step A
909) to end the fanfare/interval process.

Here, in this embodiment, as a jackpot pattern, 16R probability variable A (all long open)
, 16R variable B (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open), 16R normal A (all long open), 16R normal B (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open), 4R variable (all short open)
is set. In addition, probability variation is a jackpot in which the probability state after the end of the special game state is a high probability state, and normal is a jackpot in which the probability state after the end of the special game state is a low probability state. Therefore, in the big winning opening operation determination table, 16R variable probability A data and open switching determination value "0", 16R variable probability B data and open switching determination value "4", 16R normal A data and open switching determination value "0", The 16R normal B data and the open switching determination value "4" and the 4R variable probability data and the open switching determination value "0" are stored in association with each other. When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, long opening is performed, and when the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value, short opening is performed.

[Processing transition setting processing during opening of the big winning gate]
FIG. 77 shows the process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the big winning opening in the fanfare/interval process described above. In this process transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the process number is set to "4" for the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step A91
1), save the processing number in the special game processing number area (step A912). after that,
A signal related to the opening start of the big prize hole (for example, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913), and the number of prizes won to the big prize hole is stored. The information in the count number area is cleared (step A914). Then, the ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the processing transition setting processing during the opening of the large winning opening ends.

[Processing during the opening of the big winning mouth]
Next, the details of the process during opening of the big winning opening (step A12) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit area of RWM, and the current round is It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001).
Then, if it is not the final round (step A1001; N), a large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), an open switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and a special It is determined whether the number of rounds in the gaming state is greater than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1004).
If the number of rounds is greater than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1005), Prepare an interval command for the interval between rounds (
Step A1007), effect command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, and the processing during opening of the large winning opening is completed.

Also, if the number of rounds is not greater than the open switching determination value (step A1004; N)
, the remaining ball processing time for long closing (eg 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1006), and an interval command is prepared (step A1007)
, the effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the large winning opening open process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), save the final remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special game processing timer area (step A1008),
Prepare an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen when the special game state ends (step A1009), effect command setting processing (step A101
0) is performed, the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, and the large winning opening open processing is completed.

[Large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 79 shows the transition setting processing for the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A1011) in the above-described processing during the opening of the large winning opening. In this large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, the processing number is set to "5" for the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, in order to close the opening/closing member 990 of the special variable winning device 38, the OFF data for turning off the large winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A102).
3), the process of setting transition to the processing of remaining balls in the big winning opening is terminated.

[Large prize mouth residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the big winning hole remaining ball processing (step A13) in the special game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 80, in the big winning hole remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit of the round number upper limit area of RWM, and the current round is It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

And if the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step A
1101; N) sets a large winning opening operation determination table (step A1102), acquires an open switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information (step A1103), and sets a normal interval time (for example, 0. 1 second) is set (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special game state is greater than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1105), and if the number of rounds is greater than the open switching determination value (step A
At 1105;Y), the process proceeds to step A1109. Also, when the number of rounds is not greater than the open switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the big winning opening open information is a value of the rank down effect system (step A1106).

Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to the effect of notifying that the subsequent rounds will be short release rounds. Specifically, as a jackpot pattern, 16R probability variable A (all long open),
16R variable B (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open), 16R normal A (all long open)
, 16R normal B (long opening for 1 to 4R, short opening for 5 to 16R) is selected, a predetermined big winning round performance is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 for 1R to 3R of the big winning round. Then, at the 4th round, the round continuation notification effect is executed. 16 jackpot patterns selected
If it is R probability variable A or 16R normal B (all long open), it is reported that long open will continue in the round continuation notification effect, and the big prize opening is opened long open even in rounds after the 5th round. In addition, if the selected jackpot pattern is 16R probability variable B or 16R normal B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), a rank down effect is performed in the round continuation notification effect, resulting in short open. This is notified, and the big prize opening will be opened for a short time in rounds after the 5th round.

When the big winning opening opening information is not a value of the rank down effect system (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Also, when the big winning opening opening information is a rank down effect system value (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Also, if the number of rounds is the value of the special production round (
Step A1107; Y), for example, if the number of rounds is 4R, set the interval time (for example, 3.6 seconds) for the rank down production (step A1108), step A
1109 processing is performed. In addition, the number of special rounds is not limited to one type, for example, 4R and 8R
A plurality of types may be provided.

Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1109), fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and large winning opening remaining ball processing exit.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special game state is the final round (step A1
101; Y) loads the flag from the special game mode flag saving area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A1111), and stores the loaded flag, the big winning opening opening information, and the stop symbol pattern. set the ending time corresponding to (step A11
12), save the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special game processing timer area (step A1113). After that, jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A1
114) is performed to end the big winning hole remaining ball processing.

[Fanfare/In-interval process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 81 shows fanfare/interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) in the above-described large winning hole remaining ball process. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process 2, first, "3", which is the process number related to the fanfare/interval process, is set (step A1121), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A1122).
Next, save a signal (for example, turn off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) related to the end of opening the big winning port (special variable winning device 38) in the test signal output data area (step A112
3) Ends the fanfare/in-interval process transition setting process 2 .

[Jackpot end processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 82 shows the big hit ending process transition setting process (step A1114) in the above-described big winning hole remaining ball process. In this jackpot end processing shift setting processing, first, "6" is set as the processing number related to the jackpot end processing (step A1131), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (step A1132). After that, a signal (for example, turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) regarding the end of opening of the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133).

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the big winning opening is cleared (step A1134), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1135). ), the information in the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1136). Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for determining the upper limit of the number of rounds is cleared (step A113).
7) Clear the information in the big winning opening opening information area storing the flag for judging the opening information of the big winning opening (step A1138), and finish the big winning ending process transition setting process.

[Jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot ending process (step A14) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in this jackpot end processing, first, the probability fluctuation determination flag set based on the type of special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is set to a high probability after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether it is high-probability data that is set when a state is established (step A1201).

If it is not high probability data (step A1201; N), perform jackpot end setting processing 1 (step A1202), and if it is high probability data (step A1201; Y), perform jackpot end setting processing 2 (step A1203 ), prepare a probability information command corresponding to the special game mode flag (step A1204), command setting process (step A12
05).

Next, as processing for saving information necessary for management of the performance mode in the game control device 100, first, a performance mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A1206). Then, referring to the set effect mode information setting table, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1207). Furthermore, after the end of the special game state, obtain the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to be set and save it in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1208),
Next mode transition information of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1209).

After that, prepare a command corresponding to the new production mode number (step A1210),
The command is saved in the production mode command area (step A1211), and command setting processing (step A1212) is performed. Then, the special figure normal process shift setting process 2 is performed (step A1213), and the big hit end process is terminated.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
In FIG. 84, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A120
2) was shown. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and a signal relating to the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

Next, the general pattern high probability & general electric support flag is saved in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A1223), and the special pattern low probability & short time flag is saved in the special pattern game mode flag area (step A1224). After that, the probability information command (
Time reduction) is saved (step A1225), the initial value of the time reduction variation frequency (eg 100) is saved in the time reduction variation frequency area (step A1226), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. In addition, by setting the initial value of the number of time-saving fluctuations (for example, 100) in the time-saving number-of-time area, the time-saving state is terminated by executing the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
In FIG. 85, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A120
3) was shown. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of the high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231), and a signal relating to the start of the high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

Next, the general pattern high probability & general electric support flag is saved in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A1233), and the special pattern high probability & short time flag is saved in the special pattern game mode flag area (step A1234). After that, the probability information command (
High probability) is saved (step A1235), the time reduction variation frequency area is cleared (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the high probability state and the time saving state until derivation of the next special result mode.

That is, after the end of the special game state, the game control device 100, over a predetermined period of time, the specific game state (time saving state) to extend the period of opening the normal variable winning device 37
can generate a specific game state generation control means.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting process 2]
In FIG. 86, the special figure normal processing transition setting processing 2 (step A
1219). In this special figure normal processing transition setting process 2, first, "0" is set as the processing number related to the special figure normal processing (step A1241), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1242). .

After that, the signals related to the end of the jackpot (for example, turn off the jackpot 1 signal, turn off the jackpot 3 signal, turn off the jackpot 4 signal) are saved in the external information output data area (step A1
243), a signal related to the end of the jackpot (for example, turn off the conditional device operating signal, turn off the character continuous operating device operating signal, turn off the special symbol 1 winning signal, turn off the special symbol 2 winning signal
F) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the presentation mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, clear the information in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1248), save the fraud monitoring period flag in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), special figure normal processing transition setting processing 2 exit.

[Processing during small win fanfare]
Next, small winning fanfare middle processing (step A15) in the special game processing described above
will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 87(a), in the process during the small hit fanfare, a process transition setting process (step A1301) during the small hit is performed.

[Small hit medium process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the process shift setting process (step A1301) during the small hit in the process during the small hit fanfare described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 87(b), in the small hit middle process shift setting process, first, set "8" for the small hit middle process as the process number (step A1311), and set the process number to the special game process. Save in number area (step A131
2).

Next, save the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small winning game in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and signal regarding the start of the small winning operation (for example, special electric role 1 ON signal during operation) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Next, in order to open the opening/closing member 990 of the special variable prize winning device 38, ON data for turning on the large prize winning solenoid 38b is saved in the large prize winning solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, clear the information in the big winning opening count area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening (step A1316), and save the small winning operation initial value (for example, "0") in the small winning middle control pointer area. (Step A1317), to end the process transition setting process in the small hit.

[Small hit medium processing]
Next, the details of the process (step A16) during the small hit in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 88, in the process during the small hit, first, the value of the control pointer during the small hit is loaded (step A1401), and the loaded value is the end value of the small hit operation (for example, "6")
It is determined whether or not the above is satisfied (step A1402).
When the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hit medium control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed, and the small End the winning process.

On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag evacuation area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is in the special figure high probability (step A1406)
). This determines whether it is a small hit in the special figure high probability. In addition, here, it does not matter whether it is in the time saving state.
If the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y
), a small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle process is terminated. Also, if the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), prepare a command for the small hit end screen (step A1407), perform production command setting processing (step A1408), Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing (
Step A1409) is performed, and the process during the small hit is terminated.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small-hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) in the above-described small-hit middle process will be described. As shown in FIG. 89, in the small hit operation transition setting process, branch processing (step A1411) is performed according to the control pointer (control pointer during the small hit).

At step A1411, if the control pointer is "0", "2", "4", the wait time corresponding to the control pointer (for example, 1500 msec) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1412), The off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hit operation transition setting process is terminated.
Also, in step A1411, if the control pointer is "1", "3", or "5", the opening time (for example, 200 milliseconds) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special game processing timer area. (Step A1414), ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (Step A1415), and the small hit operation transition setting process is terminated.

Here, in the case of this embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300ms, 200m
Opening for seconds and closing for 1500 milliseconds are alternately performed, and the control pointer during the small winning is sequentially updated at the end of opening and closing.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 ms opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 ms opening to the first 1500 ms closing), the control pointer during the small hit is updated to "0" and 1 At the end of the first 1500 ms closure (i.e., 2
When switching to the second 200 ms opening), the control pointer during the small hit is updated to "1",
At the end of the second 200 msec opening, the control pointer during the small win is updated to "2", at the end of the second closing of 1500 msec, the control pointer during the small win is updated to "3", and the third 200
At the end of opening for m seconds, the control pointer during the small hit is updated to "4", and at the end of closing for the third 1500 m seconds, the control pointer during the small hit is updated to "5". Then, at the end of the fourth opening of 200 ms, the small hit middle control pointer is updated to "6", and after the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 ms and the small winning ending time of 100 ms after that, the small hit is reached. State ends. Therefore, after being opened for 200 ms for the fourth time, it is closed for 2000 ms, so the apparent ending time is 2000 ms.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing in the above-mentioned small hit medium processing (step A140
9) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 90, in the small-hit remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, set "9" for the small-hit remaining ball processing as the processing number (step A142
1), save the processing number in the special game processing number area (step A1422).
Next, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1423), the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1424), and the small The hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing is terminated.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the special game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 91(a), in the small-hit residual ball processing, small-hit end processing transition setting processing (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, small hit end processing transition setting processing (step A15
01) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the small hit end processing transition setting process, first, set "10" for the small hit end process as the processing number (step A
1511), save the processing number in the special game processing number area (step A1512
).

Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1513), and the signal regarding the end of the small hit operation (for example, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is turned OFF). is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514
).
Next, clear the information of the big winning opening count number area (step A1515), clear the information of the control pointer area during the small hit (for example, 0 clear) (step A1516), and end the small hit end processing transition setting process .

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end processing (step A18) in the special game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 92, in the small hit end process, first, the flag is loaded from the special game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special high probability ( step A1602).
If the loaded flag is not a flag related to special figure high probability (step A1602; N
) sets the effect mode information address table (step A1603), and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of variation (at the time of setting the stop symbol) (step A1604).

Then, the production mode number of the production mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the production mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the production remaining rotation number of the production mode to be transferred is acquired,
Save to the effect remaining rotation speed area in the RAM (step A1606), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted, and save it to the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A1607). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the production mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1609). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area upon restoration from power failure (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A1610), Effect command setting process (step A1611
)I do.
Next, prepare an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed (step A161
2) Performs effect command setting processing (step A1613).
Next, prepare a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count (step A1614), and effect command setting processing (step A1615) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new production mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616
), if the mode is not left-handed (step A1616; N), step A1619
to process. In addition, if the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), prepare a left-handed instruction notification command (step A1617), effect command setting processing (
After performing step A1618), the process proceeds to step A1619.

Then, load the flag from the special game mode flag save area (step A1619
), determine whether the loaded flag is a flag related to special figure time saving (during time saving state) (
step A1620).
If the loaded flag is a flag related to special figure time saving (step A1620; Y)
To, the special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end processing is ended.
Also, if the loaded flag is not a flag related to special figure time saving (step A1620
;N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621), and a display LED during right-handed hitting (for example,
In order to turn off the first game state display unit 57), save the number in the left-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (step A1622), special figure normal processing transition setting process 3 (step A1
623) is performed, and the small hit end processing is terminated.

[Special figure normal process transition setting process 3]
Next, special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3 (step A162
3) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 93, in the special figure normal processing transition setting process, first, "0" for the special figure normal process is set as the processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is entered in the special figure game processing number area. Save (step A1632).

Next, a signal related to the end of the small win (for example, turn off the 1 big win signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and a signal related to the end of the small win (for example,
Special symbol 1 small hit signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1
634).
Next, the information of the fluctuating pattern discrimination flag area is cleared (step A1635), the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636), and the information of the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1637).
Then, during the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 3 is terminated.

[Production command setting process]
Next, the details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 94, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
If the performance serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the performance serial transmission buffer (step A2001).
Also, if the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N),
Write the command data (MODE) to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).
).

Next, read the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2004)
, determines whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
If the performance serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the performance serial transmission buffer (step A2004).
Also, if the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N),
Write the command data (ACTION) to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A20
06), the effect command setting process is terminated.
Note that the effect command setting process may be simply referred to as "command setting process".

[Symbol variation control process]
FIG. 95 shows the symbol variation control process (steps A20, A22) in the above-described special game process.
), symbol variation control processing (step B15) in the general-purpose game processing to be described later. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling variation of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) and normal symbols (normal symbol) and setting display data of special symbols and normal symbols.

In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag for the symbol to be controlled (for example, any one of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the normal figure) is changing (step A2
101). In the case of this embodiment, on the variation control table prepared in steps A19, A21, and B14, the lower address of the variation control flag area, the initial value of the flashing control timer, the upper limit determination value of the variation pattern number, the display table 2 ( address for stop), display table 1
A (variable) address is defined.

When the changing flag applied to the symbol to be controlled is changing (step A2102; Y)
acquires a pattern display table (for variation) corresponding to the pattern to be controlled (step A21
03). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the pattern display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in steps A19, A21 and B14.
Next, the blinking control timer to be controlled is updated by -1 (step A2104), and it is determined whether the blinking control timer after updating is "0" (step A2105), and the blinking control timer after updating is "0". If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variable pattern number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

If the flashing control timer after updating is "0" (step A2105; Y), the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target flashing timer area is saved (step A2106).
, the variable symbol number to be controlled is updated by +1 within the corresponding range (step A2107), and the display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (step A2108).
Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111
), the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the in-fluctuation flag applied to the symbol to be controlled is not in fluctuation (step A2102
;N) acquires a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (step A2109). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the pattern display table (for stop) is defined on the variation control table prepared in steps A19, A21 and B14.
Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (step A
2110), and save the acquired display data in the target segment area (step A21
11), the symbol variation control process is terminated.

As the flashing control timer initial value saved in step A2106, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, the first
A value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the flashing control timer initial value in the variation control table of the special figure (first special figure variation display game), and the second special figure (second special figure variation display game) variation control table A value corresponding to 104 ms is defined as the flashing control timer initial value, and a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the flashing control timer initial value in the fluctuation control table of the normal pattern (normal pattern fluctuation display game). This flashing control timer initial value is an interval for updating the lighting pattern in the batch display device 50 during the variable time.

Further, the corresponding range in step A2107 is defined by the variation symbol number upper limit judgment value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the fluctuation pattern number reaches the upper limit value by updating the fluctuation pattern number by +1 in step A2107, the fluctuation pattern number is set to 0. ) are updated sequentially. In steps A2108 and A2111, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to this variable pattern number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the upper limit determination value of the variable pattern number. is performed, the display is repeated.

Here, 8 is defined as the fluctuation symbol number upper limit determination value in the fluctuation control table of the first special figure (first special figure fluctuation display game), and the fluctuation pattern number can be updated in the range of 0-7. Therefore, the special figure 1 variable display that is repeatedly displayed during the variation display of the first special figure variation display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern eight times. In addition, 2 is defined as the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value in the fluctuation control table of the second special figure (second special figure fluctuation display game), and the fluctuation pattern number can be alternately updated to 0 and 1. Therefore, the display during the special figure 2 fluctuation, which is repeatedly displayed during the fluctuation display of the second special figure fluctuation display game, is completed by updating the lighting pattern twice. In addition, 4 is defined as the upper limit determination value for the variable pattern number in the variation control table for the normal pattern (normal pattern variation display game), and the variable pattern number can be updated within the range of 0-3.
Therefore, the display during the normal pattern fluctuation, which is repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, is completed by updating the lighting pattern four times.

By defining the flashing control timer initial value and the variable pattern number upper limit value in the variable control table prepared according to the game to be processed in this way, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are completed. You can set the number of updates for each game.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step S110) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled, and the display of the general-purpose pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 96, in the normal game process, first, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the normal electric winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the general pattern game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already timed up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game processing number. A process of setting a general-purpose game sequence branch table in a register (step B5) is performed, and a process of obtaining a branch destination address of a process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number using the table (step B6) is performed. Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the general-purpose game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, if the normal pattern game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the normal pattern fluctuation are performed. Normal figure normal processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the general pattern game processing number is "1", a general pattern variation process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the normal pattern display process is performed.

Further, in step B7, if the general pattern game processing number is "2", if the result of the general pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern opening time is set according to whether or not it is in the time saving state. Or, during the normal map display process (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal pattern per process.
Further, in step B7, if the normal game processing number is "3", the processing during the normal game is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing is set during the normal game. Processing (step B11) is performed.

Further, in step B7, if the general pattern game processing number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing general pattern per end processing is performed.
Also, in step B7, if the general pattern game processing number is "5", general pattern per end processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display (step B14), the pattern fluctuation control process (step B15 ) to end the general-purpose game process.
On the other hand, in step B4, the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not "0" (step B4;
N), that is, if it is determined that the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 97, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether it is in a right-handed game state (for example, during a big hit, during a small hit, during a special figure time reduction (during normal electric support)). (Step B1
02).
If it is in the game state to hit right (step B102; Y), it is determined whether the number of normal pattern reservations is acquired and the number of normal pattern reservations is less than the upper limit value (for example, "4") (step B105).
Also, if it is not a game state to hit right (step B102; N), prepare a left hitting instruction command (step B103), perform the production command setting process (step B104), and then acquire the number of normal figure reservations. It is determined whether the number of normal diagram reservations is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105).

If the number of reserved general patterns is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved general patterns is updated by +1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved normal patterns after updating is calculated. (step B107). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the winning design random number is extracted and saved in the winning design random number storage area of the RWM (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is performed. exit.

Also, if it is determined that there is no input to the gate switch 34a in step B101 (step B101; N), or if it is determined that the number of normal pattern reservations is not less than the upper limit value in step B105 (step B105; N), End the gate switch monitoring process.

[General electric winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general/universal electric winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described general/universal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, in the normal electrical winning switch monitoring process, first, the normal pattern winning is in progress, that is, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is performing the opening operation for a predetermined number of times in the normal pattern variation display game winning state. It is determined whether there is (step B201). Then, if the normal game is in progress (step B201; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y).
), the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether the count number of the general electric counter after the update is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (for example, "6") (step B204), and the count number is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step B204; Y).
If it is determined, the value (for example, "4") for the end of the hit operation is saved in the control pointer area during the normal pattern hit (step B205), the normal pattern game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step B206),
The general electric winning switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, if there is a normal electric winning prize of more than the upper limit value during the winning state of the general figure, the winning state of the general figure is terminated on the way at that time.

In addition, when it is determined that it is not in the normal pattern at step B201 (step B201; N
), when it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or when it is determined in step B204 that the general electric count number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step B204; N). terminates the electric winning switch monitoring process.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose normal processing (step B8) in the above-described general-purpose game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 99, in the general pattern normal processing, first, it is determined whether the general pattern reservation number is "0" (step B301), and if the general pattern reservation number is "0" (step B201; Y )
, the general pattern normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step B321) is performed, and the general pattern normal processing is terminated. Also, if the normal pattern reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), the random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and the hit pattern random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) ( Step B302), hit random number storage area (reserved number 1), hit pattern random number storage area (reserved number 1
) is cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability of a hit result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is normal probability (that is, normal pattern low probability) Is in the normal pattern high probability, that is, It is determined whether it is in a time saving state (step B304).

If it is not in the normal pattern high probability (step B304; N), set the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the normal pattern low probability (step B305), If it is in the normal pattern high probability (step B
304; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of normal pattern high probability (step B306).
After that, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B307). (Step B3
08).

If the value of the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (step B307; Y), or if the value of the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B3
08; Y) saves the losing information in the winning flag area (step B309), sets the losing stop pattern number (step B310), and saves the losing design information in the normal pattern stop design information area (step B311). , the stop pattern number is saved in the normal pattern stop pattern area (step B315).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the winning information is saved in the winning flag area (step B
312), set the winning stop design number corresponding to the winning design random number loaded in step B302 (step B313), and save the stop design information corresponding to the stop design number in the general design stop design information area (step B314). ), and the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B315).

In the case of this embodiment, the probability of hitting at the time of normal pattern low probability is 0/251, the probability of hitting at the time of normal pattern high probability is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is "251", and the low probability lower limit judgment value is "251", and the high probability lower limit judgment value is "1".
Therefore, when the normal pattern is low probability, the value of the hit random number is "0" to "250".
In addition, at the time of normal pattern high probability, the case where the value of the random number is any one of "1" to "250" is hit, and the case where the value of the random number is "0" is lost.

After saving the stop design number in the normal design stop design area (step B315), the stop design number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316).
After that, the winning random number storage area is shifted (step B317), and the empty area after the shift is set to 0
It is cleared (step B318), and the number of general pattern reservations is updated by -1 (step B319). That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the process of advancing the ranking of the normal pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number 1 by one I do. By this process, the values for the general pattern holding number 2 to the general pattern holding number 4 in the general pattern random number storage area are moved from the general pattern holding number 1 to the general pattern holding number 3 in the general pattern random number storage area. It will be done.
Then, the value for the normal pattern reservation number 4 in the normal pattern random number storage area is cleared, and the normal pattern reservation number is decremented by 1.
Then, the process shift setting process (step B320) is performed during normal pattern fluctuation, and the normal pattern normal process is terminated.

[General figure normal process transition setting process 1]
In FIG. 100, normal pattern normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step B32
1), shows the normal map normal processing transition setting process 1 (step B508) in the normal map display process described later. In this general pattern normal processing transition setting process 1, first, "0" is set as the processing number for transitioning to general pattern normal processing (step B331), and the processing number is saved in the general pattern game processing number area (step B331). B332). After that, the during fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the general/universal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B333), and the general/universal diagram normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Normal figure fluctuation process transition setting process]
In FIG. 101, the process transition setting process during normal pattern fluctuation in the normal pattern normal processing described above (step B32
0) was shown. In this normal pattern fluctuation process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the processing number for transitioning to the normal pattern fluctuation process (step B341), and the processing number is saved in the normal pattern game processing number area ( Step B342).
After that, the general pattern fluctuation time (for example, 500 ms. In the case of this embodiment, the general pattern fluctuation time is common in the general pattern low probability state and the general pattern high probability state.) to the normal pattern game processing timer area. Save (step B343), save a signal related to the start of the normal pattern 1 fluctuation display game (for example, turn on the signal during normal pattern 1 fluctuation) in the test signal output data area (step B344), and the normal pattern fluctuation display game is changed A flag during fluctuation indicating that it is in the middle is saved in the normal figure fluctuation control flag area (step B345).
Then, save the flashing control timer initial value (here 52 ms), which is the initial value of the timer of the flashing cycle of the normal pattern display, in the normal pattern flashing control timer area (step B346), and set processing transition during normal pattern fluctuation exit.

[Normal map fluctuation process]
Next, the details of the process during normal game fluctuation (step B9) in the normal game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 102(a), in the normal pattern fluctuation process, a normal pattern display process transition setting process (step B401) is performed.

[Processing setting process during normal map display]
Next, the process transition setting process during normal pattern display in the normal pattern fluctuation process described above (step B401
) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 102(b), in the process transition setting process during normal diagram display, first, the process number is set to "2" as a setting process for shifting to the process during normal diagram display (step B411), and the process is performed. Save the number in the normal game processing number area (step B4
12). After that, the normal pattern display time (for example, 600 milliseconds), which is the display time of the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game on the normal pattern display, is saved in the normal pattern game processing timer area (step B413).
), a signal related to the end of the normal pattern fluctuation (for example, the signal during normal pattern 1 fluctuation is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and a stop flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal pattern fluctuation control flag area (step B415), and the process transition setting process during normal pattern display is completed.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-purpose map displaying process (step B10) in the above-described general-purpose map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 103, in the general pattern display process, first, the hit flag (hit information or loss information) set in the normal pattern normal process is loaded (step B501), and the RWM
The winning flag area is cleared (step B502), and it is determined whether the loaded winning flag is winning information (step B503).

If the hit flag is not the winning information (step B503; N), the normal pattern normal processing transition setting process 1 (step B508) for shifting to the normal pattern normal processing is performed, and the normal pattern displaying process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the hit flag is the hit information (step B503; Y), set the process setting table during the hit (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information (for example, "0 , '2', or '4'), and saves it in the control pointer area during normal per figure (step B505). Then, the general electric open time (for example, 500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the general pattern stop pattern information is acquired and saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B506). After that, per normal pattern middle processing transition setting processing (step B21
1) is performed, and the processing during the normal map display ends.

[Regular figure per middle process transition setting process]
FIG. 104 shows the process shift setting process (step B507) during the per normal pattern in the above normal pattern display process. In this general pattern per middle process transition setting process, first, "3" is set as a processing number for transitioning to the general pattern per middle process (step B511), and the processing number is saved in the general pattern game processing number area. (Step B512). After that, a signal related to the hit of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (for example, the signal during normal pattern 1 hit is turned on) and a signal related to the start of normal electric operation (for example, the signal during normal electric accessory 1 operation is turned on) are test signal output data In order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the common solenoid (step B513), ON data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (step B514).

Furthermore, the information in the electric power count area that stores the number of prizes won to the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is cleared (step B515), The information in the fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step B516). Then, save the flag (fraud monitoring period outside flag) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and end the process transition setting process during normal per figure. do.

[Medium processing per normal pattern]
Next, the details of the processing (step B11) during the normal pattern hit in the normal pattern game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 105, in the normal per pattern process, first, the control pointer during normal per pattern is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal per pattern control pointer is greater than or equal to the upper limit value. (step B602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer during the normal per pattern is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step B602; N
) updates the control pointer by +1 during the normal pattern hit (step B603), performs the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B604), and ends the normal pattern hit process.
In addition, when the value of the control pointer in the normal pattern is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; Y)
, does not perform the process of +1 updating the process control pointer area during the normal pattern hit in step B603, performs the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B604), and ends the process during the normal pattern hit.

[General electric operation transition setting process]
In FIG. 106, normal electric operation transition setting processing (step B60
4) was shown. The general electric operation transition setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the general electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and is a control pointer (normal control pointer).
The processing is branched according to the value of In this general electric operation transition setting process, first, a branch process is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B611).

If the value of the control pointer is "0" or "2", the process proceeds to step B612,
In order to control the closing of the normal variable winning device 37, the wait time after closing the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B612).
), in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the OFF data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B613), and the general electric operation shift setting process is terminated.

Also, if the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B614, and in order to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer Save the general electric open time, which is the open time, in the general electric game processing timer area (step B614), save the ON data in the general electric solenoid output data area in order to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c (step B615), The normal electric operation transition setting process is ended.

Also, if the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B616, the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is terminated, and the normal electric remaining ball process is performed.
” is set (step B616). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal game processing number area (step B617), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B619). After that, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B619), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

Here, in this embodiment, for example, 200 m is set as the wait time in step B612.
In step B614, 1700 milliseconds are saved as the normal electric discharge time, and in step B618, 600 milliseconds are saved as the normal electric remaining ball processing time.
Furthermore, when the normal pattern stop symbol is "hit pattern 1", in step B505 of the normal pattern display process shown in FIG. At step B506, "500 msec" is obtained as the normal/universal power release time.
Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, the general electric power (normal variable prize winning device 37) opens for 500 msec because the electric power opening time is "500 msec", and after that, the control pointer during the normal figure hits "4". Therefore, the normal electric remaining bulb processing time of 600 msec is set.
Further, when the normal pattern stop pattern is "hit pattern 2", in step B505 of the normal pattern display process shown in FIG. At step B506, "1700 msec" is obtained as the normal/universal power release time.
Therefore, after the display time of 600 ms has passed, the general electric open time is "1700 ms", so the general electric is opened for 1700 ms, and after that, the normal control pointer is "2", so 2
A wait time of 00 msec is set, and then the general electric power is opened for 1700 msec because the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "3", and then the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "4". Therefore, 600 ms of normal electric remaining bulb processing time is set.
Further, when the normal pattern stop pattern is "hit pattern 3", in step B505 of the normal pattern display process shown in FIG. At step B506, "1700 msec" is obtained as the normal/universal power release time.
Therefore, after the display time of 600 ms has elapsed, the general electricity is opened for 1700 ms because the general electricity open time is "1700 ms", and after that the normal control pointer is "0", so 2
A wait time of 00 msec is set, and then the general electric power is opened for 1700 msec because the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "1", and then the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "2". Therefore, a wait time of 200 ms is set, and then the control pointer during the normal figure hits "
3”, the normal electric is opened for 1700 msec, and then the normal electric remaining ball processing time of 600 msec is set because the normal control pointer is updated to “4”.

[Public electric residual bulb treatment]
Next, the details of the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) in the above-described normal game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 107(a), in the normal electric remaining ball process, a normal pattern per end process transition setting process (step B701) is performed.

[Regular figure per end process transition setting process]
Next, in the normal electric remaining ball processing described above, the normal pattern per end processing transition setting process (step B70
1) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 107(b), in the end processing transition setting process per normal pattern, first, the processing number "5" related to end processing per normal pattern is set (step B711
), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B712).

After that, the general pattern ending time (eg 100 ms) is saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B713), and a signal related to the end of the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (for example,
Normal electric accessory 1 in operation signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the normal electric count area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B715) . Then, the control pointer area in the per normal pattern is cleared (step B716), and the end processing transition setting process per normal pattern is terminated.

[End processing per normal pattern]
Next, the details of the end processing (step B13) per normal pattern in the normal pattern game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 108(a), in the normal pattern per end process, the normal pattern normal process transition setting process 2 (step B801) is performed.

[General figure normal process transition setting process 2]
Next, normal pattern normal processing transition setting processing 2 (step B80
1) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 108(b), in the normal pattern normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number "0" relating to the normal normal process is set (step B811), and the process number is changed to the normal pattern game process. Save in the number area (step B812).

After that, a signal related to the end of the winning of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (for example, the normal one winning signal is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the irregularity monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is defined. The flag (unauthorized monitoring period flag) is saved in the general electric unauthorized monitoring period flag area (step B814), and the general pattern normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, segment LED editing processing (step S111
) will be described in detail. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 reservation indicator provided in the collective display device 50, the special figure 2 reservation indicator, the general figure reservation indicator, the first game state display section, the second
Settings related to the driving of the segment LEDs constituting the game state display section and the round display section are made.

As shown in FIG. 109, in the segment LED editing process, first, the flashing control timer is set to +1.
It is updated (step S501), and it is determined whether or not the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1 (step S502). In this embodiment, when bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that it is the output-on timing.
It creates a blinking cycle of seconds.
If it is the output on timing (step S502; Y), set the normal pattern reservation number display table 1 out of the normal pattern reservation number display tables 1 and 2 that specify the display mode on the general pattern reservation display. (Step S503), if it is not the output ON timing (Step S502; N)
, sets the number display table 2 of the normal pattern (step S504).
Then, the display data corresponding to the number of normal patterns reserved is acquired from the set number of normal patterns reserved display table and saved in the segment area of the normal pattern reserved display (step S505). In this embodiment, if the number of reserved normal patterns is any of "0" to "2", the display data will be the same regardless of which normal pattern reserved number display table is set.

Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506), and if it is the output on timing (step S506; Y), the special figure 1 reservation number that the display mode in the special figure 1 reservation indicator is specified Of the display tables 1 and 2, set the special figure 1 reservation number display table 1 (step S507), and if it is not the output on timing (step S506; N), set the special figure 1 reservation number display table 2 ( step S508).
Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is acquired from the set special figure 1 reservation number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 reservation display (step S509).

After that, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S510), and if it is the output on timing (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 reservation number display in which the display mode in the special figure 2 reservation indicator is specified Of the tables 1 and 2, set the special figure 2 pending number display table 1 (step S511), and if it is not the output on timing (step S510; N), special figure 2
The pending number display table 2 is set (step S512).
Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is acquired from the set special figure 2 reservation number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 reservation display (step S513).
In addition, set a round display table that defines the display mode in the round display section (
Step S514), the display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area of the round display section (step S515).

Next, when the time saving state occurs, the second game state display unit 58 lights up to notify the time saving state occurrence
is set (step S516), the display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the first game state display section (step S517). ). In the present embodiment, the first gaming state display unit consisting of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal operation and to be turned on during special time reduction (during normal electric support).
After that, the game state display table 2 is set, which defines the display mode in the second game state display section for notifying that the game state is such that right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting (step S518).
), the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second game state display section (step S519), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. In this embodiment, the second gaming state display unit consisting of one LED is turned off during normal hitting (left hitting) and turned off during right hitting (in the case of this embodiment, during big hits, during small wins, and during normal electric support). ) are configured to be illuminated.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 110, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, based on the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (step S601
). If the magnetic sensor 61 is ON (step S601; Y), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the detection period of the abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 (
Step S602), it is determined whether the timer has timed up (Step S603)
. In the case of this embodiment, it is determined that the time has expired when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 milliseconds or more.

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S603).
604), the initial value of the magnet fraud alert timer (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud alert timer area (step S605). Then, a command for informing illegal magnets is prepared (step S6
06), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S6).
13). That is, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously on for a certain period of time (eight interrupts, for example).

On the other hand, if the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, if no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud that defines the notification time of the magnet fraud is detected. If the notification timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to "0". and,
It is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step S610). Note that even if the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step S603; N), step S
609 processing is performed.

If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not "0" (step S610; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step S610; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, and the fraud notification period has expired or the If the notification has not been made, a command to end the magnet irregularity notification is prepared (step S611). Furthermore, a magnet fraud cancellation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S
612), determine if the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag field (
step S613).

If the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and effect command setting processing is performed. (step S615), and ends the magnet fraud monitoring process.
Here, "step S601; N"→"step S608"→"step S609"→
"Step S610; Y"→"Step S611"→"Step S612"→"Step S613; Y" is the normal route.

[Processing for monitoring radio wave fraud]
Next, the details of the board radio wave unauthorized monitoring process (step S113) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the radio fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 111, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I/F 121, It is determined whether or not the board radio wave sensor 62 is ON, ie, an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). When the radio wave sensor is on (step S701;
Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

Then, a command for notifying the radio wave fraud is prepared (step S703), and a radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a radio wave fraud flag (step S704). It is determined whether they match (step S709). Specifically, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred at the point in time.

On the other hand, if the board radio wave sensor 62 is not ON (step S701; N), that is, if no abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave tampering notification timer that defines the radio wave tampering notification time is "0".
If not, it is updated by -1 (step S705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave tampering alarm timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is "0" (step S706).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not "0" (step S706; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step S706; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired and the period of fraud notification has expired, or if the If the notification has not been made, prepare a command to terminate the radio wave fraud notification (step S70).
7) Prepare a flag for canceling radio wave fraud as a radio wave fraud flag (step S708),
It is determined whether or not the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (step S709).

If the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared radio wave fraud flag does not match the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; N), the prepared radio wave fraud flag is saved in the radio wave fraud flag area (step S710). Setting processing is performed (step S711), and the radio wave unauthorized monitoring processing ends.
Here, "step S701; N"→"step S705"→"step S706; Y
' → 'step S707' → 'step S708' → 'step S709; Y' is the normal route.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, payout command transmission process (step S105)
, Winning hole switch/state monitoring process (step S108), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S
112), based on the monitoring results of the board radio fraud monitoring process (step S113), create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal, amusement center internal management device, or a test firing test device, and set it in the output buffer. processing, etc.

As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, in the external information editing process, first, if neither a glass frame open error has occurred (step S801; N) nor a body frame open error has occurred (step S802; N), , the door/frame open signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the security signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. .
On the other hand, if a glass frame open error is occurring (step S801; Y), or
If the main body frame open error is occurring (step S802; Y), the ON data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S805), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved. The data is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer, which counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 milliseconds) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like, is not "0", it is updated by -1 ( step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when starting with RAM clear in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810. to process. again,
If the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the process proceeds to step S810 without performing the process of step S809. .

Then, if magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), if board radio fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), if frame radio fraud is occurring (step S81
2; Y), when general electric fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), or when big winning gate fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the ON data of the security signal is output as external information. Save in the data area (step S816), save the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (step S817), and step S818.
to process. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, no magnet fraud has occurred (step S810; N), no board radio fraud has occurred (step S811; N), and no frame radio fraud has occurred (step S812; N).
, When the electric fraud is not occurring (step S813; N) and the big winning hole fraud is not occurring (step S814; N), the OFF data of the game machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step S815), the process proceeds to step S818.

Then, main prize ball signal editing processing (step S818) for setting information about the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and starting signal editing processing (step S819) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed.
)I do.
Next, if the pattern determination count control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the execution count of the special figure variation display game is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S820). In addition, the minimum value of the pattern determination count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the pattern determination count control timer is "0" (step S821).

When the value of the pattern confirmation count control timer is "0" (step S821; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the OFF data of the pattern confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area. (step S822) to end the external information editing process.
Also, if the value of the design determination count control timer is not "0" (step S821; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the ON data of the design determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S823), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the main prize ball signal editing process (step S818) in the external information editing process described above
will be described in detail. In the main prize ball signal editing process, the main prize ball signal generated each time the number of prize balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in the case of this embodiment) is This is the process of outputting to the device.

As shown in FIG. 114, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832; Y), the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is "0".
” (step S833).

If the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is not "0" (step S833; N), the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by -1 (step S834), and the main prize ball is stored in the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The initial value of the signal output control timer is saved (step S835). The initial value of this main prize ball signal output control timer is the time (for example, 128 milliseconds) during which the main prize ball signal is on (for example, high level) and the time (for example, 64 milliseconds) for the main prize ball signal's off state (for example, low level).
m seconds), the ON state time (for example, 128 ms). After that, save the ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal in the external information output data area of RWM (
Step S837), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.
Also, if the number of output of the main prize ball signal is "0" (step S833; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0" (step S832; N
) determines whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S
836). It should be noted that the fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0". If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. Also, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step S8
36;N) saves off data for turning off the main prize signal for the external device in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S838), and ends the main prize signal editing process.

In this embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal each time the number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 10 game balls. A main prize ball signal is output every time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the main prize number signal output count by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every 10 scheduled payouts (every time the payout command is transmitted).
Then, the main prize ball signal is output for the updated (set) number of output times.
Since a prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 balls are actually paid out in response to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the schedule and result can be matched. Ability to deal with fraudulent payouts. In addition, even if you win during the jackpot period, the payout is delayed due to running out of balls, etc., and even if the payout is made after the jackpot ends, the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning will ensure that the hall controller (hall computer) is accurate. Can collect (judge) information.

[Starting port signal editing process]
Next, the details of the starting point signal editing process (step S819) in the external information editing process described above will be described. The starting port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 115, in the starting point signal editing process, first, if the starting point signal output control timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S841). Note that the minimum value of the starting signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting port signal output control timer is "0" (step S842). If the value of the starter signal output control timer is "0" (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the starter signal output count is "0" (step S843).

If the starting signal output count is not "0" (step S843; N), the starting signal output count is updated by -1 (step S844), and the starting signal output control timer is set to the starting signal output control timer area. The initial values are saved (step S845). The starting signal output control timer initial value is the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128) of the starting signal.
m seconds) and the OFF state (eg, low level) time (eg, 64 ms), the ON state time (eg, 128 ms). After that, ON data for turning on the starter signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the starter signal editing process is terminated.
If the start signal output count is "0" (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S843; Y). S848), the starting port signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the starting signal output control timer is not "0" (step S842; N), it is determined whether the starting signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S846).
. It should be noted that the fact that the starting signal output control timer is in the output ON section means that the value of the starting signal output control timer is not "0". If the starting port signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the starter signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the starter signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S848), the starting port signal editing process is terminated.

Next, an effect in a game and control by the effect control device 300 for controlling this effect will be described. 116 and 117 show an example of the effect in the special game state. here,
A case where a 16R probability variable B jackpot including a short opening occurs is shown.

After the result mode of the big hit is derived in the special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 116(a), a fanfare effect corresponding to the kind of big win is performed, and then the round game is started. As shown in FIG. 116(b), in the display device 41, a round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds,
A pattern display 41b for displaying a big hit pattern derived in the decorative special figure variation display game, a right-handed hitting instruction display 41c for instructing right-handed hitting, and an acquired game ball number display 41d showing the number of winning balls acquired by long opening are displayed. .

Then, as shown in FIG. 116(c), when a game ball enters the special variable prize winning device 38 in a long open round to obtain a prize ball, the number of prize balls is displayed as the number of prize balls display 41e. , is added to the acquired game ball number display 41d. When the round ends and it becomes an interval, an interval performance is performed as shown in FIG. 116(d). Here, the next round is also long open, so the interval effect for long open is performed.

In addition, when the round game progresses and it becomes a mode transition selection round in which the notification mode at the end of the special game state and the presentation mode after the special game state can be selected, the mode shifts as shown in FIG. 116 (e). A selection screen 41f is displayed. In this mode transition selection screen 41f, the first
A normal mode as a mode and a delé mode as a second mode can be selected, and selection is made by moving a finger-like cursor by operating the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player.

In addition, in the interval performance of the round that may be short open from the next time, that is, here, in the interval performance after the end of 4R, a round continuation performance 41g is performed to notify whether or not the long open will continue from the next time onward. . In this round continuation effect 41g, FIG.
), the characters "short" and "long" flash alternately, and the final lit character indicates the result. It is Furthermore, when it is notified that it will be short open, as an interval effect Fig. 1
As shown in 17(b), an promotion effect 41h is performed to prompt the player to aim at the special variable winning device 38. FIG. Incidentally, for example, when the jackpot type is 16R probability variable A (all long open), in the round continuation effect 41g, the character "Long" lights up to notify that the long open will be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 117(c), the promotion effect 41h is continued even in the short opening round. Further, an emphasizing effect 41i emphasizing that the special variable winning device 38 is open is performed.
This emphasizing effect 41i is a display as if light is emitted from the special variable winning device 38. - 特許庁The special variable prize winning device 38 is provided with decoration means for decorating with light emission, and the light emission timing, light emission intensity, light emission color, etc. are associated with the light emission mode of the decoration means and the display mode of the emphasis effect 41i. may be synchronized with or may not be synchronized.

Further, when the round with short opening is started, the obtained game ball number display 41d indicating the number of prize balls obtained with short opening is displayed separately from the obtained game ball number display 41d indicating the number of prize balls obtained with long opening. is displayed. In addition, the number of rounds display 41a displays the remaining number of openings. Here, there are 12 rounds left, including the round in progress, and each round is unlocked once, so there is 1 more round to go.
It says open twice. After that, as shown in FIG. 117(d), when the round with short opening ends and the interval time comes, the promotion effect 41h is continued, but the special variable winning device 38
The emphasizing effect 41i for emphasizing that the is open ends once, and when the next round starts as shown in FIG. 117(e), the emphasizing effect 41i is resumed.

Then, when the final round ends, an ending effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 117(f) and (g). In this ending effect, as shown in FIG. 117(f), an obtained game ball number display 41d indicating the number of prize balls obtained by long opening and a short opening obtained game ball number display 41j indicating the number of prize balls obtained by short opening are displayed. 117(g), a total number display 41k for displaying the total number of prize balls obtained in the special game state is performed.

In addition, in the ending effect, a state suggestion display 41m, which is a display suggesting the probability state after the end of the special game state, is performed. The content of this state suggestive display differs depending on the effect mode selected by the player in the mode transition selection round, and as shown in FIG. The character (4) is selected according to a predetermined selection rate. As shown in FIG. 118(a), when the normal mode constituting the first mode is selected, only the character (1) is selected when the high probability state occurs, and (2 characters) when the low probability state occurs. ) are selected. Also, FIG. 118 (
As shown in b), when the delé mode, which is the second mode, is selected, the characters (1) to (4) are selected according to the probability state and the selection rate. Note that the probability state may be suggested not only by the character image but also by character information such as words.

[Main processing]
In order to perform the effects as described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 119 and timer interrupt processing (not shown). As shown in FIG. 119, in the main processing, processing at the start of the program is performed first. In the processing at the start of this program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1),
Initialize the CPU (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), the random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, a performance button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. Inputs from the performance button 25 and the touch panel 29 are read in timer interrupt processing, and in this performance button input processing, when there is an input from the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29, processing for changing performance contents, etc. is performed.

Then, the setting of the changeable range such as the brightness of the LED and liquid crystal, the volume, etc., and the LED
A hall/player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness of the liquid crystal, the volume, etc. is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to commands from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) is performed for editing settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) to set the completion of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C15). In this embodiment, the V blank interrupt (1/6
0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined at step C15 that it is time to switch frames (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), decoration control processing (step C17) for controlling LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed. Then, an initial operation process for setting the initial operation of the movable effect device is performed (step C20), an effect mode management process for managing the effect mode is performed (step C21), and a process for clearing the WDT (step C8). back to

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 120 shows received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands have been received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception count (step C201). It is determined whether or not the number is 0 (step C202
). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, copy the contents of the receive command buffer to the command area (step C204
), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C206).
Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer,
The content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during command analysis, the command (data
can be moved to create space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the number of command copies corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. Further, when it is determined that copying of the commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210). Then, if it is determined that the command analysis for the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 121 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether or not MODE and ACT are within the normal range (steps C232 and C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y
), it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C2
34).

If it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C2
34;N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
At step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235
At ;Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
At step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during the big win, or a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.) during the small win. and MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the big-hit command (step C237; Y), the big-hit command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined at step C237 that the MODE is not within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not the MODE is within the range of the symbol commands (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), symbol-based command processing (
Step C240) is performed to terminate the received command analysis process.

Also, in step C239, if it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the symbol-based command (
At step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as the pending number command and error command (step C241). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The single-shot commands include a customer waiting demo command, a pending number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error/illegal command, and a model designation command. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C24
1; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (
At step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), look-ahead symbol system command processing (step C2
44) to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. Also, in step C245,
If it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; N)
, the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, the look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game will be a big hit when the special figure variation display game corresponding to the start memory (hold) that has not been executed is executed after that. (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be), in order to inform the player in advance with a predetermined degree of reliability, the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a manner different from usual, or the display device 41 is produced. It is a production such as displaying. The look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead pattern system command) is a command to inform in advance of the variation pattern and the stop design corresponding to the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and is sent from the game control device 100 at the time of start winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 122 shows single command processing in the received command analysis processing described above. In this one-shot system command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information about the model set in the game control device 100 (step C261
). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the model specifying command (step C261; Y), model setting processing is performed to rewrite the internal information with model information corresponding to the command (step C262), and single command processing is performed. exit.

If it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), RA indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized
It is determined whether it corresponds to the M initialization command (step C263). and M.
If it is determined that the ODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263
In ;Y), RAM initialization processing is performed (step C264), and the one-shot system command processing is terminated. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), the area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and R
Set the AM initialization screen information. Furthermore, scenario data for RAM initialization is set in order to perform an effect when the RAM is initialized.

If it is determined at step C263 that MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), MODE is set to a power failure recovery command indicating recovery from a power failure without initializing the RAM 111C. It is determined whether they correspond (step C265). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), power failure recovery processing is performed (step C266), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and the recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. In addition, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to produce an effect at the time of power failure recovery.

If it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to a power failure restoration command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a customer waiting demonstration command indicating the start of a customer waiting demonstration. (step C267). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; Y),
A customer waiting demonstration process is performed (step C268), and the single command process is terminated. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set to the customer waiting demonstration, and customer waiting scenario data is set for the customer waiting effect.

Also, in step C267, when it is determined that MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether MODE is special figure 1 pending (
Step C269). And when MODE is special figure 1 pending (step C269; Y
), special figure 1 reservation information setting processing for performing processing such as displaying on the display device 41 the decorative start memory display corresponding to the generated reservation is performed (step C270), and the single-shot system command processing is completed. Also, in step C269, when it is determined that MODE does not correspond to special figure 1 suspension (step C269; N), it is determined whether MODE is special figure 2 suspension (step C271). Then, when the MODE is special figure 2 pending (step C271; Y), perform special figure 2 pending information setting processing such as processing to display on the display device 41 the decoration start memory display corresponding to the occurring hold (Step C272), the one-shot command processing is terminated. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes a starting memory display means for performing a starting memory notification display for displaying information about the starting memory by a starting memory display (decorative starting memory display) corresponding to each starting memory.

Also, in step C271, if MODE is not special figure 2 pending (step C271; N
), it is determined whether MODE is probability information (step C273). and mods
If E is probability information (step C273; Y), probability information setting processing for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the one-shot command processing is terminated.

Also, in step C273, if MODE is not probability information (step C273; N)
Then, it is determined whether the MODE is error/illegal (step C275). and MO
If the DE is error/illegal (step C275; Y), it performs error/illegal setting processing (step C276) to perform corresponding processing such as error notification, and terminates the one-shot command processing.

Also, in step C275, if the MODE is not error/illegal (step C275;
N), it is determined whether MODE is effect mode switching (step C277). And, when MODE is production mode switching (step C277; Y), production mode switching setting processing for switching the production mode is performed (step C278), and single-shot system command processing is terminated.

Also, in step C277, if MODE is not production mode switching (step C277
;N), it is determined whether the MODE is symbol stop (step C279). and M.
If the ODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the single-shot command processing is terminated. If the MODE is symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is normal (step C280). In the determination of whether it is a normal command, for example, it is determined whether the target of the symbol stop command is the special figure that is currently fluctuating.

If the command is not a normal command (step C280; N), the one-shot command processing is terminated. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), the corresponding special figure is set to stop (step C281), and if all symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). , terminates the single-shot command processing. As a result, the variable display of the corresponding decoration special figure variable display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state, and in addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as during fluctuation, during big hit, during small hit, etc., and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Prefetching pattern command processing]
FIG. 123 shows the look-ahead symbol system command processing (step C244) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this look-ahead symbol system command processing, first, it is determined whether the latest pending information is special figure 1 pending (step C301). If the latest pending information is special figure 1 pending (step C301; Y), that is, if the received look-ahead pattern system command is related to special figure 1 pending, the command special corresponding to special figure 1 pending number 1 (step C302), sets a flag for waiting for reception of a prefetch variation command (step C304), and terminates the prefetch symbol system command processing.

Also, if the latest pending information is not special figure 1 pending (step C301; N), that is,
If the received lookahead design system command is related to special figure 2 reservation, save the command in the special figure 2 lookahead design command area corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reservations (step C303), lookahead variation command reception waiting flag It is set (step C304), and the look-ahead symbol system command processing is terminated. The prefetching variation command reception wait flag is set in step C304 because the prefetching pattern command and the prefetching variation command (prefetching variation pattern command) are set (paired).

[Prefetching variation command processing]
FIG. 124 shows the prefetch variation command processing (step C246) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this look-ahead variation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not a look-ahead variation command is waiting for reception (step C311). Here, when there is a prefetch variation command reception waiting flag set in the prefetch symbol system command processing described above, it is determined that the reception is waiting. If the prefetch variation command is not waiting to be received (step C31
1;N) ends the look-ahead variation command processing. On the other hand, when waiting for reception of the prefetch variation command (step C311; Y), the flag for waiting for reception of the prefetch variation command is cleared (step C312).

After that, in the processing of steps C313 to C316, the prefetching variation command (prefetching variation pattern command) received from the game control device 100 is converted so as to be convenient for the processing in the effect control device 300. First, the processing (step C313) for setting the look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds of the pattern of the latest hold information is performed, and the information of the special figure type of the start memory corresponding to the look-ahead fluctuation system command received this time and the relevant Depending on the current pending number of special figure type, to set the MODE conversion table for converting the MODE.

Next, referring to the set MODE conversion table, the intra-sub prefetch variation command MODE corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE is acquired (step C314). moreover,
A look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and an intra-sub look-ahead conversion command ACT corresponding to the look-ahead variation command ACT is obtained (step C316).

MODE contains information on the first half fluctuation, but the contents and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE will change depending on the number of reservations at the time of judgment, so judgment at the time of pre-judgment and special figure fluctuation display Game start Judgment results may differ depending on the timing. Therefore, in order to be able to easily and reliably process the pre-reading notice effect without being affected by the number of reservations at the time of judgment, MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of reservations, and at the time of judgment It is designed so that it can be handled in common regardless of the number of reservations. For example, if it is a change without reach and may have a short first half fluctuation time depending on the hold situation, or if it is a change without reach and has a long first half change time regardless of the hold situation, To make it possible to easily and surely perform processing of a prefetching advance notice performance by converting into MODEs classified by items to be considered in setting the prereading notice performance.

In addition, ACT includes information on changes in the second half, such as the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach.
The content of the second half variation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holdings at the time of determination. However, for example, even in normal reach, the final stop symbol is set to stop one frame before the reach symbol, stop one frame ahead, and hit.
Even with the same type of reach, there are various aspects, and the ACT corresponding to each of them is set, so the range of values is wide. Therefore, the number of ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is converted into the same ACT to reduce the number of ACTs, thereby reducing the processing load such as checking in the processing of the pre-reading advance notice effect.

Next, it is determined whether both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C31
7). If both MODE and ACT after conversion are not 0 (step C317; N),
Since the command value is abnormal, the prefetch variation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, MO after conversion
If both DE and ACT are other than 0 (step C317; Y), the post-conversion command is saved in the look-ahead variable command area corresponding to the latest hold information and hold number (step C318).
), prefetch command consistency check processing (step C319) is performed to determine whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal.

If the command combination is not normal (step C320; N) as a result of the look-ahead command consistency check processing (step C319), the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated. on the other hand,
If the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), a pre-reading lottery process (step C321) for drawing lots for execution of the pre-reading notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether the pre-reading notice effect is to be generated (step C322).

Then, if the look-ahead advance notice effect is not generated (step C322; N), the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the pre-reading notice effect is to be generated (step C322; Y
) determines whether the pre-reading forewarning effect to be generated (that is, the fore-reading forewarning effect selected in the foreseeing lottery process (step C321)) is the effect to start immediately (step C3
23). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the current time. In addition, the production that does not start immediately is a pre-reading notice production that is performed during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game. These include an effect in which a notice is given by a character appearing during display, and a pending change notice in which the display mode of the decorative start memory display is changed at a later timing than the current time. In addition, as the timing of starting execution of such an effect that does not start immediately, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the special figure fluctuation display game ends, and the execution of the next special figure fluctuation display game starts This corresponds to the timing at which the

If the effect does not start immediately (step C323; N), the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated. In this case, the setting of the notice is performed at the start of the special figure variation display game for executing the look-ahead notice effect. On the other hand, if the effect is to start immediately (step C323; Y), a display corresponding to the selected pre-reading preview effect is set (step C324), and the pre-reading variation command processing is terminated.

[Processing of pattern-based commands]
FIG. 125 shows the pattern-based command processing (step C) in the received command analysis processing described above.
240) was shown. In this symbol system command processing, first, special figure type corresponding to MODE (
Either special figure 1 or special figure 2) is set (step C351), the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set and saved (step C352), and the symbol system command processing is terminated.

The pattern type is a lost pattern, 16R probability variation A jackpot pattern, 16R probability variation B jackpot pattern, 16
It is a category of symbols such as R normal A jackpot pattern, 16R normal B jackpot pattern, 4R variable probability jackpot pattern, small hit pattern, etc., and is associated with ACT data. Since the ratio of symbols changes between special figure 1 and special figure 2 (probability variation ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and the data of MODE is provided from a plurality of symbol type setting tables. is selected, and the symbol type corresponding to the ACT is set by referring to the table.

[Processing of variable commands]
FIG. 126 shows the variable command processing (step C
236). In this variation-based command process, first, it is determined whether the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the symbol system command process described above.

If this special figure type is undecided (step C361; Y), the variation system command processing is terminated. Also, if the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, check the combination of the variation command and the symbol command (
Step C362), it is determined whether the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C
363).

When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variation system command processing is terminated. Also, if the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C3
63; N) determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a lost pattern, a 16R probability variable A jackpot pattern, a 16R probability variable B jackpot pattern, a 16R normal A jackpot pattern, a 16R normal B jackpot pattern, a 4R probability variable jackpot pattern, and a small There are hit patterns and so on. When the variation command and the pattern type are inconsistent, an effect is performed like when the pattern command of the 16R probability variation A jackpot pattern is received although the variation command (variation pattern command) is received. It means that it is a combination that contradicts above (combination of variation command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, a variable performance setting process for setting information for performing performance corresponding to the variable command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure fluctuation is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366
). Here, "during special figure fluctuation" means that the special figure is fluctuating (not during a demonstration waiting for customers, during a big hit, or during a fanfare). Furthermore, if the number of look-ahead effects (the number of look-ahead execution times) is not zero, the number of look-ahead effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of look-ahead effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command process ends.

[Variation effect setting process]
FIG. 127 shows the variation effect setting process (step C36) in the above-described variation command process.
5) was shown. In this fluctuation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern type is reachless fluctuation (step C381). If the variation pattern type is reachless variation (step C381; Y), the model code and special figure type and the first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the production mode at that time are set (step C382). In addition, since there is no reach variation, the symbol type is always a lost symbol, and the symbol type need not be particularly referred to here. Note that the production mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the production control device 300,
Of course, it differs depending on the model, but here there are low probability mode, probability variable mode, time saving mode and latent mode. Furthermore, a plurality of modes are provided in each mode in which the distribution rate of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 are different.

Next, with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of MODE and special figure type is obtained (step C383).
. As a result, in the case of fluctuation without reach, it is possible to change the lottery contents of the announcement effect appearing during each fluctuation (specifically, the appearance rate of each announcement effect mode) according to the number of reservations. After that, a lottery for the advance notice that appears during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half advance notice distribution group table (step C386).

On the other hand, if the variation pattern type is not a reachless variation (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode and the symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the fluctuation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half notice distribution group table is used to change the first half. A lottery for the advance notice that appears in .

Next, the advance notice effect of the second half fluctuation is drawn by lottery. In addition, the second half of the special figure fluctuation display game is the so-called reach action (for example, the display area excluding the specific area of the multiple rows of the special figure display area is a big hit). is stopped and the variable display is performed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half variation of the special figure variation display game is the variation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the late notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode and symbol type is set (step C387). The second half advance notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half advance notice distribution group table.
Then, referring to the second half advance notice distribution group address table, the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired (step C388), and the second half notice distribution group table is used to change the second half (during reach). A lottery for the notice to appear is performed (step C389).
).

After that, determine the contents of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT (step C390),
The content of the effect corresponding to the result of the advance notice lottery is determined (step C391). As a result, the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game and the production and notice such as the main reach content are determined. Further, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol with reference to the determined special figure variation display game variation pattern (ready effect, etc.) and the contents of the notice is performed (step C392).

Next, an action substitution process is performed to set another movable effect member to operate in place of the movable effect member having malfunction in the initial motion (step C393). Details of the action substitution process will be described later. Then, display setting of variable effect is performed (step C394), and display setting of notice effect is performed (step C395). By these processes, it is possible to execute the effect and notice in the decoration special figure variation display game set as described above. After that, the display setting of the pending decrease corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C396). In this process, setting is made to reduce the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the reduction of the corresponding starting memory when starting the special figure fluctuation display game.

Then, set the sound number, which is the BGM number, the decoration number, which is the number indicating the type of effect by the decoration lamp, etc. (step C397), and the decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type (variation display of identification information) Display settings are made (step C398). Furthermore, in the information display device 630, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol for displaying the decoration special symbol variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type (Step C39
9) End the variable effect setting process.

[Jackpot command processing]
FIG. 128 shows the jackpot command processing (step C238) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this jackpot command process, first, it is determined whether the MODE is fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). Then, if the MODE is fanfare (step C401; Y), fanfare effect setting processing for setting a fanfare display image according to the type of big win or small win is performed (step C402), and the state of the P machine is set to fanfare. After setting (step C403), the jackpot command process is terminated.

If MODE is not fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether MODE is round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state. If the MODE is round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the round number display information is performed (step C405), the P machine state is set to be in a round (step C406), End the jackpot command processing.

If MODE is not round (step C404; N), it is determined whether MODE is interval (step C407). That is, it determines whether the received command is an interval command relating to the interval between rounds. When the MODE is interval (step C407; Y), interval performance setting processing for setting the performance during the interval is performed (step C408), the state of the P machine is set during the interval (step C409), and the jackpot is won. End system command processing. If MODE is not interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to the ending after the end of the final round.

When the MODE is the ending (step C410; Y), for example, when the high probability state is reached after the end of the special game state, screen information is set to notify that the high probability state is reached, and the jackpot ends. Ending effect setting processing for setting screen information corresponding to the subsequent game state, etc. is performed (step C411), the P machine state is set to ending (step C412), and the jackpot command processing is terminated. If MODE is not ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether MODE is count (step C
413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a large winning opening count command based on the winning to the special variable winning device 38 .

If the MODE is not count (step C413; N), the jackpot system command processing is terminated. If the MODE is count (step C413; Y), a count effect setting process (step C414) for setting an effect corresponding to the winning of the special variable prize winning device 38 is performed, and the big hit system command process is terminated.

[Count effect setting process]
FIG. 129 shows the count effect setting process (step C414) in the above-described jackpot command process. In this fanfare effect setting process, first, it is determined whether it is a short open round in which the openable time is equal to or shorter than a predetermined time (step C421). In this embodiment, the openable time for the short open round is 0.2 seconds, and the openable time for the long open round is 29 seconds.

Then, if it is not a short open round (step C421; N), that is, if it is a long open round, the acquired game ball number counter is updated based on the big winning hole count command (
Step C422), the display setting of the acquired game ball number display 41d based on the acquired game ball number counter is performed (step C423), and the count effect setting process is terminated. The winning game ball number counter counts the number of prize balls to be paid out due to the winning of the special variable winning device 38 in the long open round, and in step C422, updating is performed to add the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning. , the updated value is displayed in step C423.

In addition, if it is a short opening round (step C421; Y), the short opening pattern counter is updated based on the big winning opening count command (step C424), and the short opening acquired game ball is based on the short opening pattern counter. Display setting of number display 41j is performed (step C
425), the count effect setting process is terminated. The short opening pattern counter counts the number of prize balls to be paid out due to the winning of the special variable prize winning device 38 in the short opening round, and in step C424 the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning is updated to add. , the updated value is displayed in step C425.

As a result, the number of winning prizes to the special variable winning device 38 in long opening and the number of winning prizes to the special variable winning device 38 in short opening are separately counted and displayed. That is, the effect control device 300 includes a winning determination means for determining whether the winning to the special variable winning device 38 is in the first open mode (long open) or the second open mode (short open). Eggplant. again,
The production control device 300 determines the number of prize balls based on the winning to the special variable winning device 38 in the first opening mode (long opening) based on the determination of winning by the winning determination means, and the special The number of winning balls based on the winning to the variable winning device 38 and the number of winning balls are counted separately.

[Fanfare effect setting process]
FIG. 130 shows the fanfare effect setting process (step C402) in the above-described jackpot command process. In this fanfare effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the ACT is a jackpot fanfare (step C431). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to any one of 16R probability variable A, 16R probability variable B, 16R normal A, or 16R normal B.

If the ACT is a big win fanfare (step C431; Y), the number of big wins is updated by +1 (step C432), and the display contents of the big win fanfare effect are determined based on the probability state and the number of big wins (step C433). Incidentally, the number of big hits is cleared to 0 based on the fact that the game is in a normal game state that is neither a high probability state nor a time saving state. That is, it counts the number of so-called consecutive wins. After that, the display setting of the fanfare effect corresponding to the determined contents is performed (step C434), and it is determined whether or not the big win includes a short opening (step C435). If short release is not included (step C434; N), that is, if all rounds are long release, hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. If short opening is included (step C434; Y), short opening jackpot information is set (step C436), hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. .

If the ACT is not a jackpot fanfare (step C431; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a certainty fanfare (step C437). That is, it is determined whether or not the fanfare command corresponds to 4R definite variation (sudden definite). If the ACT is a definite fanfare (step C437; Y), it is determined whether the hit is from a continuous effect, which is a effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games (step C438).

If the hit is not from the continuous effect (step C438; N), the display setting of the sudden probability exclusive effect corresponding to the probability state is performed (step C439), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect is performed. End the setting process. The sudden probability exclusive performance corresponding to the probability state is a high probability state after the special game state when the 4R probability variation occurs in the low probability state, so a performance is performed to notify or suggest that effect. Also, since the high probability state continues even after the special game state when the 4R probability variation occurs in the high probability state,
Perform a production to notify or suggest that effect.

In addition, when the hit is from the continuous performance (step C438; Y), the sudden definite performance to be executed is selected from among the sudden definite performance patterns related to the current variable performance (continuous performance) (step C440) and determined. The display setting of the sudden probability effect is performed (step C441), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. That is, in the case of the 4R probability variation from the continuous performance, the performance related to the continuous performance is performed even in the special game state. Incidentally, in the case of 4R probability variation, the number of big hits may be updated by +1.

If the ACT is not a definite fanfare (step C437; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C442). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to a small hit. If the ACT is not a small win fanfare (step C442; N), the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. Also, A
If the CT is a small hit fanfare (step C442; Y), it is determined whether the hit is from a continuous effect, which is an effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games (
Step C443).

If the winning is not from the continuous performance (step C443; N), the display setting of the small winning performance corresponding to the probability state is performed (step C444), the winning type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare is performed. Terminate the effect setting process. In the case of a small win, since there is no change in the probability state before and after the small win, the special performance for the small win corresponding to the probability state provides a performance to notify or suggest that the probability state at the time of occurrence of the small win is maintained.

In addition, when the hit is from the continuous performance (step C442; Y), the small winning performance to be executed is selected from among the small winning performance patterns related to the current fluctuation performance (continuous performance) (step C445), Display setting for the determined small winning effect is performed (step C446), winning type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. That is, in the case of a small hit from the continuous performance, the performance related to the continuous performance is performed even in the special game state.

In the case of a 4R probability change or a small hit from a continuous production, when the 4R probability change or a small hit is derived (at the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes a sudden probability or a small hit), 4R without clearly showing the result mode During the special game state based on probability variations and small hits, an effect indicating which one it is is performed. For example, an effect in which an enemy character fights with an ally character is performed as a continuous effect, and when the result mode is derived, the battle is not yet settled. Then, in the special game state, in the case of 4R probability variation, an effect (sudden probability effect) that the ally character wins is performed, and in the case of a small hit, an effect (minor win effect) is performed that the enemy character wins.

[Round effect setting process]
FIG. 131 shows the round effect setting process (step C405) in the above-described jackpot command process. In this round effect setting process, first, display setting of right hitting instruction is performed (step C461), and it is determined whether it is a special game state based on a small hit or a sudden probability (4R probability variation) (step C462).

In the case of a special game state based on a small hit or a certainty (step C462; Y), display setting of a small hit/a certainty round effect is performed (step C474), and the process proceeds to step C475. In addition, if it is not a special game state based on a small hit or a sudden hit (step C462; N), the number of rounds is derived from the round command (step C463), and short open big hit information set in the case of a big hit including a short open round. (step C464)
.

If there is no short open jackpot information (step C464; N), that is, if the special game state is for only long open rounds, the number of rounds is set to be displayed (step C465), and the display setting for the long open pattern round effect is set. (step C466). Next, the sound number, which is the BGM number based on the long open pattern, and the decoration number, which is the number indicating the type of effect by decoration lamps, etc., are set (step C467).

After that, it is determined whether it is a mode transition selection round in which a notification mode at the end of the special game state or an effect mode after the end of the special game state can be selected (step C468). If it is not the mode transition selection round (step C468; N), the round effect setting process is terminated.
If it is the mode transition selection round (step C468; Y), display setting of the mode transition selection screen is performed (step C469), and the round effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is short opening big hit information (step C464; Y), that is, if it is a special game state including short opening rounds, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value for short opening rounds (step C470). ). If the number of rounds is not a predetermined value for short open rounds (step C470; N), that is, if the rounds are long open rounds, the process proceeds to step C465.

Also, if the number of rounds is a predetermined value for short open rounds (step C470; Y)
That is, in the case of a round with a short opening, the display setting of the round effect of the short opening pattern is performed (step C471), and the number of remaining openings is calculated from the round number upper limit information and the number of rounds (step C472). Then, the display setting of the number of remaining opening times, which is the number of short opening times, is performed (step C473), and the display setting of an emphatic effect prompting the player to aim for a prize in the special variable prize winning device 38 is performed (step C475). After that, set the sound number, which is the BGM number based on the emphasized effect, and the decoration number, which is the number indicating the type of effect such as the decorative lamp (
Step C476), the round effect setting process is terminated.

That is, in a short opening round, a short opening small hit, or a 4R probability variable round, an effect different from that of a long opening round is performed. As described above, the special variable winning device 3
8 makes it easy for the game ball to stay in the opening/closing member 990, and since it is possible to aim for winning even if the opening is short, an emphasizing effect 41i is performed to urge the player to aim for winning.

[Interval effect setting process]
FIG. 132 shows interval effect setting processing (step C408) in the above-described jackpot command processing. In this interval effect setting process, first, a sound number, which is the BGM number for the long opening interval, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by decoration lamps, etc., are set (step C481), and a jackpot including a short opening round is set. It is determined whether or not there is short open jackpot information set in the case of (step C482).

If there is no short open jackpot information (step C482; N), that is, if the special game state is for only long open rounds, the interval effect setting process is terminated. In this case, Figure 1
A state in which a long open interval as shown in 16(d) is set is reached. Also, if there is short opening big hit information (step C482; Y), that is, if it is a special game state including short opening rounds, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483). The predetermined value here is the number of final rounds for long opening, which is 4 in this embodiment.

If the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483; Y), that is, if the next round is a short open round, the display setting of the round continuation notification effect is set (step C484).
), the sound number, which is the BGM number based on the round continuation notification effect, and the decoration number, which is the number indicating the type of effect by the decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C485), and the interval effect setting process is terminated. As a result, the round continuation notification effect as shown in FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b) is set.

On the other hand, if the number of rounds is not the predetermined value (step C483; N), it is determined whether the number of rounds is greater than the predetermined value (step C486). If the number of rounds is not greater than the predetermined value (step C486; N), the interval effect setting process is terminated. In this case, the next round will also be a long opening, and the long opening interval will remain set.

If the number of rounds is greater than the predetermined value (step C486; Y), the display setting for the short opening interval is performed (step C487). A decoration number indicating the type of effect is set (step C488), and the interval effect setting process is terminated. In this case, FIG. 117(d)
A short open interval is set as shown in . In the short opening interval, the promotion effect 41h is performed, but the emphasis effect 41i is not performed. However, the emphasizing effect 41i may also be performed in the same manner as during the round, or the emphasizing effect exclusively for intervals may be performed.

[Ending effect setting process]
FIG. 133 shows the ending effect setting process (step C411) in the above-described jackpot command process. In this ending effect setting process, first, the jackpot type information, which is the information on the jackpot type that triggered the occurrence of the special game state this time, is loaded (step C
491), setting of the state suggestion display is performed from the jackpot type information and the selection rate in the first mode (see FIG. 118(a)) (step C492).

Next, it is determined whether there is a mode transition flag (step C493). There are a first mode and a second mode in the performance mode after the end of the special game state, which can be selected by the player.
In the first mode and the second mode, the contents of the state suggesting display 41m, which is a display suggesting the probabilistic state,
It is a production mode in which the production of the special figure fluctuation display game is different. The selection of the effect mode can be performed on the mode transition selection screen 41f displayed in the mode transition selection round, and the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to make the selection.
When the player selects the first mode, the mode transition flag is not set, and when the player selects the second mode, the mode transition flag is set.

If there is no mode transition flag (step C493; N), that is, if the first mode is set, the process proceeds to step C495. In this case, the state suggestive display set in step C492 is displayed. If there is a mode transition flag (step C493; Y), i.e., if the second mode is set, then the state suggestion display based on the selection rate in the second mode (see FIG. 118(b)) is set ( Step C494), and shift to step C495.

After that, the total number of acquired game balls is calculated from the acquired game ball number counter and the short release pattern counter (step C495), and the addition effect display setting is performed based on the total acquired game ball number (step C496). Then, the obtained game ball number counter and the short opening pattern counter are reset (step C497), and the short opening jackpot information is reset (step C498).
, ends the ending effect setting process. By the above processing, the state suggestion display 41m corresponding to the effect mode selected by the player is performed at the end of the special game state, and the number of game balls obtained in the special game state is displayed as the total number display 41k. .

FIG. 134 shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. Figure 134 (a) ~ (c)
As shown in , a right-handed instruction display 41c may be displayed so as to flow from left to right on the display screen. In this case, the right-handed instruction display 41c is displayed so as to flow at a position that does not overlap with the pattern display 41b that displays the jackpot pattern derived in the decorative special symbol variation display game. Also, the right-handed instruction display 41c may be displayed in a flowing manner at a position overlapping the pattern display 41b.
b is always visible. In addition to the symbol display 41b, the round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds and the highlight effect 41i may or may not be hidden by the right-handed instruction display 41c.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 134(d) to (f), the promotion effect 41h prompting the player to aim at the special variable winning device 38 may be displayed so as to flow toward the special variable winning device 38. FIG. In this case, when overlapping with the symbol display 41b displaying the jackpot symbols derived in the decoration special symbol variation display game, the back side of the symbol display 41b is displayed so as to flow the promotion effect 41h as shown in FIG. 134(d). The pattern display 41b is always visible. Also, the promotion effect 41h may be displayed in a flowing manner at a position not overlapping the pattern display 41b. In addition to the symbol display 41b, the round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the emphasized effect 41i, the short open acquisition game ball number display 41j, etc. may be hidden by the promotion effect 41h, or may be hidden. Also good. Also, as shown in FIGS. 134(a) to (c), the display for operating the right-handed instruction display 41c and the display for operating the promotion effect 41h, as shown in FIGS. 134(d) to (f), are displayed simultaneously. can be

FIG. 135 also shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. As shown in FIG. 135(a), the operation unit 24 and the special variable winning device are used as a promotion effect 41h to encourage the player to aim at the special variable winning device 38 and an emphasizing effect 41i to emphasize that the special variable winning device 38 is open. device 38
may be used to instruct the player to turn the operation unit 24 to the right by a large amount or to aim at the special variable winning device 38 . By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to understand. In particular, when a plurality of special variable winning devices 38 are provided, it is possible to clearly indicate which special variable winning device 38 should be targeted. In addition, the light emitting mode of the actual special variable winning device 38 located on the lower right side of the display device 41 and the light emitting mode of the image of the special variable winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 are synchronized. The special variable winning device 38 to be aimed at can be known. Of course, the lighting modes of the operation unit 24 may also be synchronized in the same manner.

The image may be a schematic animation or an actual special variable winning device 38.
A video showing the is also acceptable. In addition, the operation unit 24 and the special variable winning device 3 displayed on the display device 41
In the image of No. 8, a display synchronized with the actual operation unit 24 or the special variable prize winning device 38 is displayed, but it is not necessary. Further, the images of the operation unit 24 and the special variable winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 may be still images.

Further, the character information and the arrow image included in the right-handed instruction display 41c and the promotion effect 41h may be displayed in a flowing manner as described above. In this case, the operation unit 24
or the front side of the image of the special variable winning device 38 may be moved, or the rear side may be moved. Further, when the collective display device 50 is displayed in the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variable winning device 38, the display may be synchronized with the actual display mode of the collective display device 50, or may be displayed without synchronization. Also good. In the case of a non-synchronized display mode, any display mode may be used. A specific number is lit, and in the case of an aggregate of LEDs, a particular lighting mode is associated with a big win, etc.).

Further, when the right-handed game state is started, an image may be displayed to instruct the player to turn the operation unit 24 to the right by a large amount or to aim at the normal variable prize winning device 37 . . Further, when the left-handed game state is started, an image may be displayed to instruct the player to turn the operation unit 24 slightly to the right or to aim at the winning device 90 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 135(b), a remaining time display 41n for displaying the remaining time until the end of the final round may be performed. The end condition of the round that is established in the case of short opening is that the opening possible time elapses rather than the predetermined number of game balls winning the special variable prize winning device 38, and the round ends in a fixed time. do. Therefore, when subsequent rounds are short-open, the remaining time until the end of the final round can be calculated by adding up the time of the round until the end of the final round and the time of the interval. By displaying the remaining time in this way, it is possible to give a different impression than in the case of notifying the number of remaining rounds, and to improve the amusement of the game. That is, the remaining time calculation means (game control device 100 or effect control device 300) for calculating the remaining time until the end of the special game state is provided, and the remaining time calculated by the remaining time calculation means can be notified. Become.

In the above-described embodiment, the first open state is continuously opened for a predetermined time or longer, i.e., the long open state, and the second open state is continued for a predetermined time or less. Although the short opening has been described, it is not limited to this, and any opening mode may be used as long as the first opening mode and the second opening mode are different. Also, as the game machine, the game machine that executes the variable display game based on the winning in the starting area is mentioned, but other game machines may be used. For example, it is possible to win a prize in the auxiliary game device based on the prize in the starting area, and the game ball that has won the auxiliary game device flows into a specific area. (former type 2 type) gaming machines may also be used.

From the above, the game board 30 having the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the start area provided in the game area 32 (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97) is a game that executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of a game ball in 97), and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In the machine 10, a special variable prize winning device 38 which can be converted to a closed state in which game balls cannot win a prize and an open state in which game balls can win prizes, and which is converted to the open state in a special game state, and a game-related performance are controlled. Effect control means (effect control device 300), and the operation mode of the special variable winning device 38 in the special game state includes a first open mode (long open) and a second open mode different from the first open mode. There is a mode (short opening), and the effect control means can execute the promotion effect 41h that prompts the shooting of game balls toward the special variable winning device 38 when the second opening mode is executed. Become. Therefore, to suppress the decrease of game balls during the special game state,
It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, a shooting operation unit (operation unit 24) operated by the player to adjust the shooting momentum of the game ball, a display device 41 capable of displaying game-related information, and a special variable winning device 38 are decorated with light emission. and a decoration means, wherein the effect control means displays the operation method of the shooting operation part necessary to set the firing force for shooting the game ball toward the special variable prize winning device 38 as the promotion effect 41h; The display device 41 displays the decoration mode of the special variable winning device 38 by the decoration means. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand the contents of the promotion effect 41h.

In addition, a game board 30 having a game area 32 in which game balls can flow down is provided, and a start area provided in the game area 32 (first start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97)
A game machine 10 for executing a variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information based on the winning of a game ball in a game ball, and generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize and an open state in which the game ball can win a prize, and has a special variable prize winning device 38 which is converted to the open state in the special game state, and has a special variable prize winning in the special game state. The mode of operation of device 38 includes a first open mode (long open) and the first open mode (long open).
There is a second opening mode (short opening) that is different from the opening mode, and a winning determination that determines whether the winning to the special variable winning device 38 is in the first opening mode or the second opening mode. Means (production control device 300) is provided. Therefore, it is possible to control the presentation and progress of the game based on the information from the prize determination means, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, the special variable winning device 38 is configured to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the winning to the special variable winning device 38, and the special variable winning device 38 in the first open mode based on the determination of the winning by the winning determination means.
A counting means (effect control device 300) for separately counting the number of prize balls based on winning to the second opening mode and the number of prize balls based on winning to the special variable winning device 38 in the second open mode is provided. Therefore, the performance and progress of the game can be controlled based on the information from the counting means, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling a game-related effect is provided, and the effect control means, based on the result of counting by the counting means, receives a prize ball based on the winning of the special variable winning device 38 in the first open mode. The number of balls and the number of prize balls based on the winning to the special variable prize winning device 38 in the second open mode can be notified separately. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the performance control means (performance control device 300) can report the counting result that has not yet been reported at a predetermined timing after reporting only a part of the counting result by the counting means. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, the initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on of the gaming machine will be described. The initial operation is for confirming the operation of the board effect device 44 that constitutes the movable effect device, and the content of the initial operation is set according to the state of the detection sensor before the start of the initial operation. .

[Initial operation processing]
FIG. 136 shows initial operation processing (step C) in the above main processing (see FIG. 119).
20) was shown. In this initial operation process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an initial operation flag (step C101). The initial operation flag is the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the game machine.
are set in the processing (step C7) of saving the initial values at power-on in the area to be initialized in step C7. That is, it is a flag that is set based on power-on.

If there is no initial operation flag (step C101; N), the process proceeds to step C108. If there is an initial operation flag (step C101; Y), the initial operation flag is cleared (step C102), and the state of the detection sensor is acquired (step C103). Then, it is determined whether or not all the detection sensors are in the normal detection state (step C104).
The normal detection state is the detection state of the detection sensor in the state where the movable effect device is in the initial position,
All normal detection states are states in which all the movable effect devices are at their initial positions, and there is no abnormality as the state of the movable effect devices when the power is turned on.

If all the detection sensors are in the normal detection state (step C104; Y), an initial operation table for performing only normal initial operations is set (step C105), and an initial operation in-execution flag is set (step C107). If all the detection sensors are not in the normal detection state (step C104; N), an initial action table is set for performing a special initial action according to the detection state (step C106), and an initial action in-execution flag is set. (Step C107
). The initial operation table is a table that defines the execution contents of the initial operation, and the initial operation is executed according to the contents of this table.

After that, it is determined whether or not there is an initial operation in-execution flag (step C108), and if there is no initial operation in-execution flag (step C108; N), the initial operation processing is terminated. If there is an initial operation in-execution flag (step C108; Y), that is, if the initial operation is being executed, it is determined whether an abnormality has been found in the initial operation being executed (step C109).
). If no abnormality is found in the initial operation being executed (step C109; N), it is determined whether all initial operations have been completed (step C113). Also, if an abnormality is found in the initial action being executed (step C109; Y), a malfunction error flag corresponding to the movable effect device in which the abnormality was found is set (step C110), and the movable effect device It is determined whether or not there is an alternative initial action, which is an initial action to be performed in place of the initial action (step C111).

If there is no alternative initial action (step C111), the process proceeds to step C113. If there is an alternative initial action (step C111), the alternative initial action is set (step C112), and the process proceeds to step C113. Then, if all initial operations have not been completed (step C113; N), the initial operation processing is terminated. Further, when all the initial operations are completed (step C113; Y), the initial operation in-execution flag is cleared (step C1
14), the initial operation process is terminated.

As described above, a detection sensor is provided for detecting the operating state corresponding to each movable effect device. be. If all the detection sensors are in the normal detection state shown in FIG. 137 before the start of the initial operation, an initial operation table for performing only the normal initial operation shown in FIG. 145(a) is set, and the initial operation is performed according to this initial operation table. will be

In this initial operation, the normal initial operation of moving the movable effect device from the initial position to the operation completion position and then returning it to the initial position is performed for each initial operation group shown in FIG. A priority is set for each initial operation group, the initial operation is performed from the group A having the highest priority, and when the initial operation of the group A is completed, the initial operation of the group B having the next priority is performed. Similarly, after the initial operation of group B is completed, the initial operation of group C is performed. When the initial operation of group C is completed, the initial operation ends.

Specifically, first, as the initial action of group A, the initial action of the central movable accessory unit 880 is performed. In this initial operation, each central movable member moves from the initial position (see FIG. 13) to the operation completion position (see FIG. 14), and then to the initial position (see FIG. 13). reference). After the initial action of the group A is completed, the initial action of the upper movable accessory unit 800 is performed as the initial action of the group B. In this initial operation, the movable member unit 820 is lowered from a state where the movable member unit 820, the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are at the initial positions (see FIG. 9) to the operation completion position. (see FIG. 10), and the first upper movable member 848 is operated (
See Figure 11). After that, the operation of returning to the initial position (see FIG. 9) is performed.

After the initial action of group B is completed, the initial action of the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 of the lower movable accessory unit 730 is performed as the initial action of group C. In this initial operation, the second lower movable member 770 is in the initial position (see FIG. 7A).
, the second lower movable member 770 is moved to the operation completion position (see FIG. 7(b)),
After that, an operation to return to the initial position (see FIG. 7A) is performed. Further, from the state where the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are at the initial positions (see FIG. 6A), the first lower movable member 74
0, 741 are moved to the operation completion position (see FIG. 6(b)), and then returned to the initial position (see FIG. 6(a)). When the initial operation of this group C is completed, the normal initial operation is completed.

The motions of the movable effect devices included in Group B include vertical motion of the movable member unit 820, rotational motion of the first upper movable member 848, and swing motion of the second upper movable member 860.
Any of these actions may be performed in a game, but in the normal initial action of group B, the swinging action of the second upper movable member 860 is not performed. The rotating motion of the first upper movable member 848 is a motion that the player expects more than the rocking motion of the second upper movable member 860, and is a motion that is performed less frequently. Usually, in the initial action, it is confirmed whether or not the action to be executed in the scene where the player's expectation is highest is executable, so that the interest of the game is not spoiled in that scene.

Also, the above-described normal initial operation is performed in order from the group including the operation that overlaps the display device 41 with a large area. That is, the initial operation of group A shown in FIG. In the initial operation of group C shown in (c) and (d), the area overlapping the display device 41 is the smallest.

Further, in the initial operation of group C, the first lower movable member 740 shown in FIG. 138(d)
, 741 and the initial operation of the second lower movable member 770 shown in FIG. . In this way, by performing an operation that overlaps with the display device 41 in a large area first, when the display of the display device 41 is started after a certain period of time has passed since the power is turned on, the display contents are not visible due to the movable effect device. can be prevented.

Performing the initial operation in such order is effective especially when a power failure occurs during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game. FIG. 139(a) shows an example of a case where a power failure occurs during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game. In this example, first, the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game are being executed, and the screen during the game as shown in FIG. 139(b) is displayed on the display device. Since the variable display is being performed here, the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85
and the second decoration game display section 88 are in a state of being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, it is in a state where an effect operation of operating the board effect device 44, which constitutes a movable effect device, is possible as a game effect, and the movable effect device can operate according to the content of the effect.

When a power failure occurs while the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed (t11), the game control device 100 interrupts the special figure fluctuation display game being executed to perform backup processing, and restores the state at the time of the power failure. Processing for holding is performed. In addition, since the effect control device 300 does not have a backup function, the information of the decoration special figure variation display game being executed is lost. Further, during the power outage, the display device 41 is in a state in which no display is made. Furthermore, it becomes a state in which the performance operation of the movable performance device cannot be performed.

After that, when the power failure is recovered (t12), the game control device 100 performs processing for restarting the game from the state at the time of the power failure based on the backed up information. Then, when the power failure is normally restored based on the backed up data, a power failure recovery command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the interrupted special figure fluctuation display game is resumed (t13).

The effect control device 300 displays the initial screen shown in FIG. 139(c) on the display device 41 along with restoration of the power failure (t12). In addition, the initial operation of the movable production device is started along with the restoration of the power failure. Then, since it is possible to grasp that the power failure is restored based on the reception of the power failure restoration command, FIG. 139 (
In d), a power failure recovery screen indicating the fact is displayed (t13).

When the variation time of the special figure variation display game ends, the game control device 100 changes to the effect control device 30
Send a symbol stop command to 0. In the performance control device 300, the information of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is lost due to the occurrence of power failure, so the decoration special figure fluctuation display game cannot be restarted, so the power failure is restored in the display device 41 even while the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed. The screen display continues. Then, since it is possible to grasp the end of the special figure variation display game along with the reception of this symbol stop command, the screen during play as shown in FIG. 139(b) is started to display the result (t1
4). As a result, the display returns to the state in which the game is played normally.
When the stop time for displaying the result has passed, a new special figure variation display game is started (t15
).

When the remaining time of the variation time of the restarted special figure variation display game is short, the initial operation may end (t20) after the result display timing (t14) as in this example, and during the display of the result A movable effect device may exist in front of the display device 41 . However, by performing the initial motions in descending order of the region overlapping the display device 41, when the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed, the region where the display device 41 is hidden by the movable effect device is reduced as much as possible. so that it does not interfere with the viewing of the results. In addition, the importance of the information in the display displayed at the time of power failure recovery is the lowest importance of the information displayed on the initial screen shown in FIG. 139 (c), followed by the power failure recovery screen information is of high importance, and the importance of result information on the in-game screen shown in FIG. 139(b) is the highest. Therefore, the visibility of more important information can be improved by performing the initial operations in descending order of the area overlapping the display device 41 .

In addition, from the viewpoint of enhancing the visibility of the result of the restarted special figure variation display game, the decoration special figure variation display, which is the display area of the decoration special figure variation display game located substantially in the center of the display area of the display device 41 The initial actions may be performed in descending order of the area overlapping the game display section 85 . Here, since the initial action of group B shown in FIG. 138(b) has the largest area overlapping the decoration special figure variation display game display portion 85, the priority of the initial action is set to the highest. 138(c) and (d), group C shown in FIG. 138(a), and group A shown in FIG. set to lower priority. Thereby, when the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed, the area where the display device 41 is hidden by the movable effect device can be reduced as much as possible, and the result can be visually recognized.

In view of the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game that variably displays identification information based on the establishment of a starting condition, and that generates a state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a predetermined effect Movable effect devices (first lower movable members 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860, first
central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910, third central movable effect member 920,
A fourth central movable production member 930), a display device 41 capable of displaying an image related to a game, and production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the movable production device and the display device. The movable effect device is configured to perform an initial action based on power-on, and among a plurality of types of actions included in the initial action, the movable effect device performs the action in descending order of the ratio of hiding the display device 41. Become. Therefore, it is possible not to obstruct the visual recognition of the information displayed when the power is turned on.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and that generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a predetermined effect operation is performed. A movable effect device, a display device 41 capable of displaying a decoration game corresponding to the game in a predetermined area, and effect control means for controlling the movable effect device and the display device 41 are provided, and the effect control means is activated based on power-on. The initial motion of the movable effect device is configured to be performed, and among the plurality of types of motions included in the initial motion, the movable effect device performs the motion in descending order of the ratio of hiding the predetermined area in the display device. . Therefore, when the power is turned on, it is possible not to hinder the visibility of the information displayed in the predetermined area.

As for the effect motion of the movable effect device, since the effect motion cannot be performed during the initial motion (t12 to t20), the effect motion cannot be performed during this period. In addition, in the effect control device 300, the information of the effect set at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost due to the occurrence of a power failure, so at least the command related to the game including the information that allows the current progress of the game to be grasped. Until it is received, it is in a state in which the movable production device corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game cannot perform the production operation.

In this example, the symbol stop command is received as a game-related command after the power is restored (t14), but since the initial operation is being executed, the movable effect device remains in a state in which the effect operation cannot be performed at this point. After receiving the symbol stop command, the initial operation ends (t
20) After that, a variation command is received as a game-related command, and from this point on, the movable effect device is allowed to perform the effect operation (t15).

That is, when a power failure occurs during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display game is restarted due to recovery, receiving a command related to the game after the initial operation is completed enables the effect operation. be a condition. Here, since the start memory exists, the variation command for the next game is received, but if there is no start memory, the customer waiting command will be received as a command related to the game after the initial operation is completed, and this customer waiting command will be received. From the point of time when the command is received, the movable performance device is brought into a state in which the performance operation can be performed.

[Production operation permission process]
FIG. 140 shows the effect operation permission process performed in the movable body control process (step C19) in the main process (see FIG. 119) in the effect control device 300. FIG. In the effect operation permission process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect operation disabled flag indicating that the effect operation of the movable effect device cannot be performed is set (step C511). This production operation disable flag is
It is designed to be set in the processing (step C7) of saving the initial value at the time of power-on to the area to be initialized by the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the gaming machine. That is, it is a flag that is set based on power-on.

If there is no effect operation disabled flag (step C511; N), that is, if the effect operation is possible, the effect operation permission process is terminated. Also, if there is an effect operation disabled flag (step C511; Y), it is determined whether there is an initial operation flag (step C51
2). This initial operation flag is a flag that instructs that the initial operation should be performed, and is a process (step C7). That is, it is a flag that is set based on power-on.

If there is this initial action flag (step C512; Y), the effect action permission process is terminated. In this case, since the initial action is to be performed from now on, the state in which the effect action cannot be performed is maintained. If there is no initial operation flag (step C512; N), it is determined whether there is an initial operation in-execution flag (step C513). This initial action in-execution flag is a flag that is set during the execution of the initial action, and is set based on the initial action being set based on the initial action flag in the initial action process (see FIG. 136), and the initial action is completed. is cleared by

If this initial action in-execution flag is present (step C513; Y), the effect action permission process is terminated. In this case, since the initial action is being executed, the state in which the effect action cannot be performed is maintained. Also, if there is no initial action in-execution flag (step C513; N), it is determined whether or not a game-related command including information enabling the current progress of the game to be grasped has been received (step C514). That is, when there is neither an initial action flag nor an initial action executing flag in a state in which the effect action disabled flag is present, it is determined whether or not a command relating to a game has been received.

If no game-related command has been received (step C514; N), the effect operation permission process is terminated. Also, when a command related to the game is received (step C514; Y
) clears the effect operation disabled flag (step C515) and terminates the effect operation permission process. As a result, the movable effect device can perform the effect operation.

In FIG. 141, in the example shown in FIG. 139, the end of the initial action (
t20) is early. In this case, the movable effect device remains in a state in which the effect motion cannot be performed until the symbol stop command is received after the initial motion is completed (t20 to t14).
From the time point (t14) when the symbol stop command is received, the movable effect device is brought into a state where the effect operation is possible.

FIG. 142(a) shows a case where the result of the special figure variation display game interrupted by the power failure in the example shown in FIG. 141 is a big hit. In this case also, the movable effect device remains in a state in which the effect motion cannot be performed until the pattern stop command is received after the initial motion is completed (t2).
0 to t14), and from the point of time when the symbol stop command is received (t14), the movable effect device is put into a state where the effect operation is possible.

FIG. 142(b) shows a case where the result of the special figure variation display game interrupted by the power failure in the example shown in FIG. 139(a) is a big hit. In this case, the symbol stop command is received as a game-related command after the power is restored (t14), but since the initial operation is being executed, the movable effect device remains in a state in which the effect operation cannot be performed at this point. . After receiving the symbol stop command, the initial operation is completed (t20), after which a fanfare command is received as a game-related command, and from this point on, the movable effect device is allowed to perform the effect operation (t30). That is, the performance operation of the movable performance device is enabled from the start of the special game state. Incidentally, in FIG. 142(a) as well, the effect operation of the movable effect device may be enabled not from the reception of the symbol stop command, but from the reception of the fanfare command, that is, from the start of the special game state.

FIG. 143 shows the case where the symbol stop command is not received. The case where the symbol stop command is not received means the case where the symbol stop command is not transmitted due to the specifications of the gaming machine, the case where the symbol stop command could not be transmitted due to some abnormality, or the transmitted symbol stop command was missed. included.

Fig. 143(a) shows a case where the symbol stop command is not received in Fig. 142(a), and when the initial operation is finished before the result is displayed after the fluctuation display is finished in the special figure fluctuation display game. is. Also, FIG. 143(b) is a case where the symbol stop command is not received in FIG. is the case. In either case, the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled from the time point (t30) when the fanfare command, which is a command related to the game, is received after the end of the initial operation, that is, from the start of the special game state.

In addition to the pattern stop command and the fanfare command, the command related to the game, which is one of the conditions for enabling the effect operation of the movable effect device, includes a variation command, a customer waiting command, a round command, an interval command, an ending command, and a command. A small hit fanfare command can be mentioned. Production control device 300 based on the reception of these commands
can grasp the progress of the current game, and can set an appropriate performance operation. Even other commands may be commands related to a game, which is one of the conditions for enabling the performance operation of the movable performance device, as long as the commands include information that enables the current progress of the game to be grasped. It is possible.

In addition, the command related to the game, which is one of the conditions for enabling the effect operation of the movable effect device, is a command that is set together with the update of the process number during one timer interruption in the special game process shown in FIG. It can also be said that For example, the symbol stop command is set by one timer interrupt in the special symbol fluctuation processing shown in FIG. 69 (step A60
1, A602) and the update of the special game process number (steps A605, A606) are performed.

In addition, since the power failure recovery command and the initialization command that indicate power-on of the game machine do not include information that allows the current progress of the game to be grasped, it is one of the conditions for enabling the production operation of the movable production device. Although not included in the commands related to the game, which is one of the conditions for enabling the performance operation of the movable performance device, these commands include information that allows the current progress of the game to be grasped. It may be used as a command. In addition, even if it does not include information that allows the current game progress to be grasped, the effect control device 300 sets an arbitrary effect operation based on this command (operation that is not linked to the progress of the game). The command may be used as a command relating to a game, which is one of the conditions for enabling the effect operation of the movable effect device.

Based on the above, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a game is executed in which identification information is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time and then the result is displayed. In a gaming machine that generates a game state, game control means (game control device 100) for overall control of a game, and performance control means (performance control device 300) for controlling game performance based on information from the game control means. , a movable effect device (first lower movable members 740, 74
1, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910, third central movable effect member 920, and a fourth central movable effect member 930), the game control means can hold information even in a power failure state, and can resume the game based on the information held when the power failure is restored. The control means is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device based on restoration of the power failure, and the game control means interrupts the game when a power failure occurs during execution of the game, and when the power failure is restored. The game is restarted, and if a power failure occurs during the execution of the game with a special result and then the power failure is restored, the initial operation of the movable presentation device, which was started along with the restoration of the power failure, is resumed. In addition, if the game ends before the end of the game, the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled from the start of the special game state. Therefore, the performance operation of the movable performance device can be performed as early as possible after the power failure is restored, and the loss of interest in the game can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent inadvertent actions in the restarted game, prevent inconsistencies in presentation, and prevent loss of interest in the game. In addition, in the special game state, normal operations are possible, so that the loss of interest in the game can be prevented.

In addition, when a power failure occurs during the execution of a game with a special result and then the power failure is restored, the effect control means ensures that the initial operation of the movable effect device, which started with the restoration of the power failure, ends before the result is displayed. In this case, the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled from the start of the display of the result. Therefore, when the initial action ends early, the effect action can be started early, and the interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 144 shows an execution mode of an operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player in the example shown in FIG. 142(b). The operation corresponding production during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game is executed with the execution timing and production contents determined at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the contents decided according to the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game. It's becoming In the state before the power failure occurs, the operation corresponding performance is executed at the scheduled timing (t41 to t42). At this time, an operation prompting image is displayed on the display device 41 to prompt the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 .

When a power failure occurs (t11), the effect control device 300 loses the effect information set at the start of the special figure variation display game. For this reason, until at least a game-related command containing information that enables the current progress of the game to be grasped is received, the operation-responsive effect cannot be executed, and the scheduled timing (t43-t44, t45-t46, t47) is reached. ～t
48) is not performed.

After that, when a symbol stop command is received as a game-related command (t14), it becomes possible to grasp the current progress of the game, and to execute an operation corresponding performance. In this case, the operation corresponding effect is not determined at the start of the special figure variation display game, but the execution timing and effect content are determined based on the received command related to the game, or the special figure variation display to be executed The timing of execution and the contents of the presentation are determined regardless of the variation pattern of the game.

Here, the operation corresponding production is executed at the timing when the result is derived in the special figure variation display game (t14 to t49). During the period during which the operation-responsive effect is executed, the operation-promoting image is not displayed because the movable effect device is performing the initial operation. That is, the production control device 30
0 is an initial action flag that indicates that an initial action should be performed, or an initial action executing flag that is set during the execution of the initial action.
Do not display the operation promotion image. It should be noted that if the initial action of the movable effect device has ended, the display of the operation prompting image is performed. That is, the mode of execution of the operation-responsive presentation is made different depending on whether or not the initial action is being executed. In addition, in the operation corresponding presentation (t50 to t51) performed after the initial operation is completed, the operation prompting image is displayed in the same manner as before the power failure.

It should be noted that the execution mode of the operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player corresponding to the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game is made different depending on the presence or absence of the initial operation, but the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game Execution modes of the operation corresponding effects based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player, which can be executed regardless of the initial action, may be changed depending on the presence or absence of the initial action.

For example, regarding the adjustment of the volume and brightness, if the initial operation is not being executed, the volume and brightness values are displayed on the display device 41 in response to the operation, and if the initial operation is not being performed, the display device 41 displays the volume and brightness values according to the operation. The volume and brightness may be changed, but the values may not be displayed. For things that are not related to the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game, such as adjustment of volume and brightness, it may be possible to adjust from the timing (t12) when the power failure is restored, or at the timing (t13) when the display of the initial screen ends
) may be adjustable. Moreover, it is good also as adjustment from the timing (t14) which received the command regarding a game like the operation corresponding production|presentation corresponding to progress of a special figure fluctuation display game.

Further, when the initial action is being performed, the operation-responsive effect may not be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 144, the operation corresponding effect is not executed from the occurrence of power failure (t11) to the end of the initial operation (t20). In addition, similar to whether or not the effect operation of the movable effect device is possible, the operation corresponding effect may not be executed until the initial operation is completed and the command regarding the game is received. In the example shown in FIG. 144, the initial operation ends (t20) from the occurrence of power failure (t11).
Then, until the fanfare command is received (t30), the operation corresponding performance is not executed. In FIG. 144, the result is a special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit, so the command related to the game after the initial action is completed is a fanfare command. If there is memory, the variation command for the next game corresponds, and if there is no start memory, the customer waiting command corresponds.

Also, the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 may be operable under the control of the effect control device 300 . For example, the state shown in FIG. 1 may be set as the initial position, and it may be possible to move to a projecting position projecting upward from the initial position. When the power is restored from the power failure, as an initial operation, the performance button 25 and the touch panel 29 are moved from the initial positions to the projecting positions and then returned to the initial positions. Then, even when the operation corresponding effect is executed during the initial operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, the pressing operation may be accepted.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, effect control for controlling the effect of the game means (effect control device 300), a display device 41 that is controlled by the effect control means and can display information about the game, and is controlled by the effect control means to operate the movable effect members in accordance with the progress of the game. Executable movable effect devices (first lower movable members 740, 741, second
Lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 8
60, first central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910, third central movable effect member 920, fourth central movable effect member 930), and operation means ( Effect button 25 and touch panel 29), the effect control means can execute a predetermined operation corresponding effect in response to the operation of the operation means, and perform the initial operation of the movable effect device based on the restoration of the power failure. , and the mode of execution of the operation-responsive presentation is made different depending on whether or not the initial action is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contradiction and inconvenience of the performance due to the performance corresponding to the operation being performed at the same time as the initial motion, and prevent the player from having excessive expectations due to confusion with the initial motion. It is possible to prevent the decline in interest in

Further, the effect control means can execute an operation corresponding effect at a predetermined timing in the game, can display an operation prompting image prompting the operation of the operation means at the predetermined timing, and when the initial action is being executed, , the operation prompting image is not displayed even at a predetermined timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies and inconveniences in the performance due to the performance corresponding to the operation being performed at the same time as the initial motion.

Also, the effect control means is configured not to execute the operation corresponding effect when the initial action is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies and inconveniences in the performance due to the performance corresponding to the operation being performed at the same time as the initial motion.

In addition, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a game is executed in which the result is displayed after the identification information is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is brought into effect. A game machine that generates a game includes a performance control means for controlling a game performance and an operation means having an operation unit for receiving an operation from a player, and the operation means can operate the operation unit under the control of the performance control means. , the performance control means performs the initial operation of the operation unit based on the restoration of the power failure, and can accept the operation of the operation unit even during the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to execute the operation corresponding performance even during the initial operation, and the interest in the game can be improved.

On the other hand, if there is a detection sensor that is not in the normal detection state before the start of the initial action, that is, if there is a movable effect device that is not in the initial position, an initial action table is set to perform a special initial action according to the detection state. Initial actions are performed. In this initial operation table, first, a special initial operation is performed for the movable effect device corresponding to the detection sensor that is not in the normal detection state. In the special initial action, a return action is performed to return the movable effect device, which is not in the initial position, to the initial position. Then, the movable effect device that has performed this special initial action does not normally perform the initial action. In other words, for the movable effect device that has performed the return motion, the initial motion is omitted because it can be confirmed that it will operate by the return motion. can be shortened. In other words, when the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is not the normal detection state, the special initial operation, which is part of the normal initial operation, is performed instead of the normal initial operation as the initial operation.

After performing this special initial action, the normal initial action is performed for the initial action group that does not include the movable effect device whose state of the detection sensor was not the normal detection state. Also, the initial action group including the movable effect device whose detection sensor state was not in the normal detection state,
For the initial action group including the movable effect device that was not subject to the special initial action, the initial action other than the movable effect device that performed the special initial action is performed. In addition, for the initial action group that has performed the special initial action for all belonging movable effect devices, the initial action other than this special initial action is not performed.

FIGS. 145(b) to 145(d) and 146 show an example of an initial operation table for performing a special initial operation. FIG. 145(b) shows an initial operation table when the seventh detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are not at the initial positions. In this case, first, as a special initial action, the third central movable effect member 9
20 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are returned to their initial positions. Next, the normal initial action is performed for the group B, which has the priority next to the group A, which is the initial action group including the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 that have performed the special initial action.

After that, the initial operation of group C is performed in accordance with the order of priority. Then, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910, which are movable effect devices that do not perform the special initial motion in the group A, return to the group A with the highest priority and perform the initial motion. initial operation only. This initial operation is, like the normal initial operation, an operation from the initial position to the operation completion position and then returning to the initial position. That is, in this case, for the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930, instead of the normal initial motion, a special initial motion obtained by omitting a part of the normal initial motion is used as the initial motion.

FIG. 145(c) shows an initial operation table when the second detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the second lower movable member 770 is not at the initial position. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a return operation for returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position is performed. Next, since group C, which is the initial operation group including the second lower movable member 770 that performed the special initial operation, has the lowest priority, group A, which has the highest priority, is returned to and the normal initial operation is performed.

Next, the normal initial motion of group B is performed, and only the first lower movable members 740 and 741, which are the movable effect devices in group C that have not performed the special initial motion, are subjected to the initial motion. This initial operation is, like the normal initial operation, an operation from the initial position to the operation completion position and then returning to the initial position. That is, in this case, for the second lower movable member 770, instead of the normal initial motion, a special initial motion obtained by omitting part of the normal initial motion is used as the initial motion.

In addition, since the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 of the lower movable accessory unit 730 of group C are configured to be driven by one drive source, one movable effect device When the special initial action is performed for the other movable effect device, it can be considered that the other movable effect device is also operable, so the other initial action may not be performed again. That is, in the example of FIG. 145(c), the fourth lower movable member 740 in the execution order,
The initial operation of G.741 may be omitted.

FIG. 145(d) shows an initial operation table when the fifth detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the first upper movable member 848 is not at the initial position. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a return operation for returning the first upper movable member 848 to the initial position is performed. Next, the normal initial operation is performed for the group C, which has the priority next to the group B for which the special initial operation has been performed.

After that, it returns to group A, which has the highest priority, and performs the normal initial operation. Then, among the group B, the initial motion is performed for the movable member unit 820, which is the movable effect device that has not performed the special initial motion. This initial operation is, like the normal initial operation, an operation from the initial position to the operation completion position and then returning to the initial position. That is, in this case, for the first upper movable member 848, instead of the normal initial motion, a special initial motion obtained by omitting part of the normal initial motion is used as the initial motion.

When the eighth detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the second upper movable member 860 is not at the initial position, the second upper movable member 860 may be returned to the initial position. . In this case, since the second upper movable member 860 does not operate in the normal initial operation, the group B performs the normal initial operation. Of course, it is not necessary to determine whether the eighth detection sensor is in the normal detection state. This is because the second upper movable member 860 only swings left and right, so that the game is not affected even if it is not in the initial position.

When the special initial action is performed as described above, the normal initial action is sequentially performed for the initial action group having the priority next to the initial action group including the movable effect device that performed the special initial action. ing. After performing the initial action for the group C with the lowest priority, it returns to the group A with the highest priority, and the initial action is performed according to the priority until the initial action is performed for all the movable effect devices.

In addition, when a plurality of movable effect devices are not at the initial position, a return operation is performed to return each of them to the initial position one by one. In this case, in the special initial operation shown in FIG. 137, the restoration operations are performed one by one in descending order of restoration priority. This return priority is set in order from the one closest to the display device 41, the first central movable effect member 900 closest to the display device 41, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, the third The order of the 4 central movable production member 930 is high, and the order of the furthest first lower movable members 740, 741 and second lower movable member 770 is low.

In FIG. 146(a), when the sixth detection sensor and the seventh detection sensor are not in the normal detection state,
That is, the initial operation table is shown when the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910, and the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are not at the initial positions. In this case, first, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 having higher return priority are returned to the initial position, and after the special initial action is completed, the return is performed. A special initial operation (return operation) for returning the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 having lower priority to the initial positions is performed.

Then, the normal initial motion is performed for the group B, which has the priority next to the group A, which is the initial motion group including the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 that finally performed the special initial motion. . After that, the normal initial operation of group C is performed in accordance with the order of priority. In this case, by performing the special initial action for group A, all of the movable effect devices belonging to group A are initialized, so the normal initial action for group A is not performed. That is, in this case, for group A, instead of the normal initial action, a special initial action obtained by omitting part of the normal initial action is used as the initial action.

In FIG. 146(b), when the seventh detection sensor and the second detection sensor are not in the normal detection state,
That is, the initial operation table is shown when the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770 are not at the initial positions. In this case, first, as a special initial action, a special initial action is performed to return the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930, which have higher return priority, to the initial positions, and after the special initial action is completed, the return is performed. A special initial operation is performed to return the second lower movable member 770 having a lower priority to the initial position.

Since the group C, which is the initial operation group including the second lower movable member 770 that finally performed the special initial operation, has the lowest priority, the group A, which has the highest priority, is returned to perform the initial operation. For group A, the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are performing special initial actions, so the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are not performing the initial action. performs only the initial operation of

Next, the normal initial operation of group B is performed, and the initial operation of group C is performed. As for the group C, since the return motion of returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position is performed, only the initial motions of the first lower movable members 740 and 741, which have not been subjected to the initial motion, are performed. That is, in this case, for the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770, instead of the normal initial action, a special initial action in which part of the normal initial action is omitted is the initial action. and

FIG. 146(c) shows an initial operation table when the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 are not in the normal detection state, that is, when the movable member unit 820 is not at the initial position. Among the movable member units 820, the movable member unit (left) which is the driving mechanism 806 which performs the left operation and the movable member unit (right) which is the driving mechanism 806 which performs the right operation are basically operated simultaneously. There is a need. Therefore, when both the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 that detect these operation states are not in the normal detection state, first, as a special initial operation, the movable member unit (left) and the movable member unit (right) are simultaneously operated to perform a return operation for returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position.

Then, the normal initial operation is performed for the group C, which has the priority next to the group B, which is the initial operation group including the movable member unit 820 that has performed the special initial operation. after that,
Returning to group A, which has the highest priority, the initial action is performed for all movable effect devices according to the priority order. Only the upper movable member 848 is initialized. That is, in this case, for the movable member unit 820, instead of the normal initial action, a special initial action obtained by omitting part of the normal initial action is used as the initial action.

FIG. 146(d) shows an initial operation table when the third detection sensor 811 is not in the normal detection state, that is, when only the movable member unit (left) is not in the initial position. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a return operation for returning the movable member unit (left) to the initial position is performed. Next, the normal initial operation is performed for the group C, which has the priority next to the group B, which is the initial operation group including the movable member unit (left) that performed the special initial operation.

After that, return to group A, which has the highest priority, and perform normal initial operation, then group B.
performs normal initial operation. Here, the movable member unit (left) in group B performs a special initial operation, but since it is necessary to operate the movable member unit (right) and the movable member unit (left) at the same time, for group B Perform normal initial operation.

That is, when either one of the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 is not in the normal detection state, first, only the movable member unit (left or right) corresponding to the detection sensor that is not in the normal detection state performs the return operation. . In this case, since the other movable member unit (left or right) has not performed a special initial operation, both movable member units (left and right) including the movable member unit (left or right) that performed the return operation later ) is normally initialized.

In addition, although the order of return priority is given in the order of proximity to the display device 41, the order may be other than this. For example, if there are movable effect devices that interfere with each other, such as overlapping motion ranges, the return priority order may be set so as not to cause problems due to interference. For example, when two movable effect devices are not in the initial position, if one movable effect device performs the return operation first, the other movable effect device collides with the other movable effect device, the other movable effect device performs the return operation first. Set a high return priority so that

Also, the return priority may be set so that the return action is performed in descending order of the area overlapping the display device 41 . In the case of the present embodiment, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 have the largest overlap area with the display device 41, so the return priority is set to the highest. In the following order, the movable member unit 820, the second lower movable member 770, the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the first lower movable members 740 and 741 become smaller in the overlapping area with the display device 41. Set so that the return priority is lowered in this order. By doing so, it is possible to quickly solve the situation where the display contents cannot be seen by the movable effect device when the display of the display device 41 is started.

In addition, the return operation is performed in order from the movable production device having a larger area overlapping with the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85 which is the display area of the decoration special figure variation display game that variably displays the identification information in the approximate center of the display area of the display device 41. You may set the return priority so that In the case of this embodiment, since the area where the movable member unit 820 overlaps the display area of the decoration special figure variation display game is the largest, the return priority is set to the highest. Below, the second lower movable member 770, the first lower movable members 740 and 741, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 Since the area overlapping with the display area of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game becomes smaller in order, it is set so that the return priority is lowered in this order. By doing so, it is possible to quickly solve the situation that hinders the visibility of the decoration special figure variation display game.

In addition, as a decoration special figure variation display game, a first decoration special figure variation display game in which identification information is variably displayed in a decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 provided substantially in the center of the display area of the display device 41; When executing the second decoration special figure variation display game that variably displays the identification information in the second decoration game display section 88 provided at a position closer to the periphery of the display area than the first decoration special figure variation display game, Either the return priority may be set according to the area overlapping only one of the decoration special figure fluctuation display games, or the return priority is set considering the overlapping area for both decoration special figure fluctuation display games You can do it. For example, when the second decoration special figure variation display game is displayed earlier than the first decoration special figure variation display game after the power is turned on, it returns according to the area overlapping only the second decoration special figure variation display game. It is preferable to set priorities.

In addition, when the special initial action is performed, the normal initial action is performed for the initial action group having the priority next to the initial action group including the movable effect device that performed the special initial action, but this is not the only option. It is not something that can be done. For example, after the special initial operation is performed, the initial operation may be sequentially performed from group A, which has the highest priority, according to the priority. again,
Immediately after performing the special initial motion, the initial motion may be performed for the initial motion group including the movable effect device that performed the special initial motion. Further, the initial operation may be performed from a group having many areas overlapping with the display area or from a group having many areas overlapping with the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85 .

Next, a description will be given of an alternative initial operation that is performed when a malfunction occurs during the initial operation.
In this embodiment, if there is an operation failure in the initial operation of group B, it is possible to substitute another operation in the group B as the initial operation.

FIG. 147(a) shows the normal initial operation of group B. FIG. In this normal initial operation, first, as step 1, the movable member unit 820, the first upper movable member 848, and the second upper movable member 8
60 is at the initial position (see FIG. 9), the movable member unit 820 is lowered to the operation completion position (see FIG. 10). Next, in process 2, the first upper movable member 848 is rotated (see FIG. 11), and in process 3, the first upper movable member 848 is returned to its initial position (see FIG. 10). After that, in process 4, the movable member unit 820 is moved to the initial position (
(see FIG. 9).

In the normal initial operation of this group B, if there is a malfunction in which the movable member unit 820 does not descend to the operation completion position in process 1, the malfunction error flag of the movable member unit 820 is set and the alternative initial operation is set. . In this case, alternative initial action 1 shown in FIG. 147(b) is set. In this alternative initial operation 1, first, as step 5, the first
The upper movable member 848 is rotated, and in step 6, the first upper movable member 848 is returned to the initial position. Thereafter, in step 7, an operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position is performed. Process 7 is performed when the movable member unit 820 operates from the initial position but does not move to the operation completion position, and is performed when the movable member unit 820 does not operate from the initial position. do not have.

Further, if there is a malfunction in which the first upper movable member 848 does not rotate in process 2 of the normal initial action of group B or process 5 of the alternative initial action 1, the first upper movable member 84
8 malfunction error flag is set and an alternative initial action is set. In this case, alternative initial action 2 shown in FIG. 147(c) is set. In this alternative initial operation 2, first, in step 8, the second upper movable member 860 is caused to swing, and in step 9, the second upper movable member 860 is returned to the initial position. After that, in step 10, the operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position is performed. Note that the process 10 is not performed when the movable member unit 820 does not move from the initial position.

Further, if there is a malfunction in which the second upper movable member 860 does not swing in process 8 of the alternative initial operation 2 of group B, the malfunction error flag of the second upper movable member 860 is set and the alternative initial operation is performed. set. In this case, alternative initial action 3 shown in FIG. 147(d) is set. In this alternative initial operation 3, as step 11, an operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position is performed. It should be noted that this is not performed if there is a malfunction in which the movable member unit 820 does not move from the initial position.

If there is an operation failure in any other process, it is treated as if there is no alternative initial operation. For example, if there is a malfunction in which the first upper movable member 848 does not return to the initial position in process 3 of the normal initial operation, the malfunction error flag of the first upper movable member 848 is set, but the alternative initial operation is not set. Then go to step 4. Also, if there is a malfunction in which the movable member unit 820 does not rise to the initial position in process 4 of the normal initial operation, the malfunction error flag of the movable member unit 820 is set, but the alternative initial operation is not set. In this case, the initial operation of the group C may be performed without raising the movable member unit 820, or the initial operation may be canceled with an error notification. It should be noted that the alternative initial operation may be performed immediately when a malfunction occurs, or the alternative initial operation may be performed after retrying the malfunctioning operation several times.

That is, the operation of rotating the first upper movable member 848 constitutes the first initial operation, and if the first initial operation cannot be performed normally, the second initial operation of rotating the second upper movable member 860 is performed.
It means that the initial operation is executed. Further, when the first initial operation of rotating the first upper movable member 848 can be performed normally, the second initial operation of rotating the second upper movable member 860 is performed.
The initial operation will not be executed.

[Motion alternative processing]
FIG. 148 shows the action substitution process (step C393) in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 127). In this motion replacement process, when the above-described alternate initial motion is performed, the defective motion can be replaced with the alternate motion. In this action substitution process, first, it is determined whether or not a performance action set as a performance such as a notice performance or a variable performance has a malfunction error flag target (step C501). The malfunction error flag is set corresponding to the movable member that malfunctioned in the initial operation. A movable member for which this malfunction error flag is set indicates that it cannot operate normally.

If there is no effect motion error flag target (step C501; N), the motion substitution process is terminated. Moreover, when there is a target of the malfunction error flag in the effect motion (step C501; Y), it is determined whether there is an alternative motion (step C502). The alternative operation in this embodiment includes the operation of the second upper movable member 8 when the first upper movable member 848 is malfunctioning.
This corresponds to the operation of the second upper movable member 860 when 60 is operable. Also, the movable member unit 82 when the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 malfunction.
This corresponds to the operation of only moving 0 up and down.

If there is an alternative action (step C502; Y), the action corresponding to the malfunction error flag is replaced with the alternative action (step C503), and the action alternative processing ends. If there is no alternative action (step C502; N), the action alternative processing is terminated. That is, when the first upper movable member 848 is inoperable and the effect action of operating the first upper movable member 848 is selected, if the second upper movable member 860 is operable, the first upper movable member 848 is operated. Instead of the operation of the upper movable member 848, the operation of the second upper movable member 860 is performed. In this case, if the second upper movable member 860 is also malfunctioning, only the movable member unit 820 is moved up and down. Furthermore, if the movable member unit 820 also malfunctions, there is no alternative operation, so the first upper movable member 848
, the second upper movable member 860 and the movable member unit 820 are not operated.

Further, when the operation of the movable member other than the first upper movable member 848 is malfunctioning and the operation of the movable member is selected, the operation of the movable member is not performed because there is no alternative operation. The motion of the movable effect device may be set as an alternative motion. For example, when the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, or the fourth central movable effect member 930 malfunctions, the movable member unit 820, the first
The operation of the upper movable member 848 or the second upper movable member 860 may be set to an alternative operation. In addition, although it is assumed that the alternative action is performed by the movable effect device, the display of the display device 41 and the LED
Alternatively, an alternative performance may be performed by emitting light, outputting sound, or the like.

If there are many operation modes, a third initial operation and subsequent initial operations may be set when the second initial operation cannot be executed normally. Also, the normal initial action and the alternative initial action are actions that may be executed in the game, but the initial action may include actions that are unlikely to be executed in the game.

In addition, instead of changing the effect once set in the action substitution process, if there is a malfunction error flag, the effect is selected using a table that does not include the action corresponding to the malfunction error flag in the options. You can make it work.

In view of the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game that variably displays identification information based on the establishment of a starting condition and generates a state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a predetermined effect can be obtained. Movable effect devices (first lower movable members 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860, first
central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910, third central movable effect member 920,
(fourth central movable production member 930) and production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable production device, and the production control means performs the initial operation of the movable production device based on power-on. and the initial operation includes a first initial operation and a second initial operation different from the first initial operation.
There is an initial action, and in the initial action, if the first initial action can be performed normally, the second initial action is not performed, and if the first initial action cannot be performed normally, the second initial action is performed. It should be executable. Therefore, the initial action can be simplified, the time required for the initial action can be shortened, and the game can be started quickly.

Also, the first initial action and the second initial action are actions that can be executed in the game effect,
The first initial action is an action suggesting that the state is more advantageous for the player than the second initial action. Therefore, first, it is possible to check the action suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state.

In addition, the production control means, although the first initial operation did not end normally in the initial operation, the second
When the initial action is normally completed and the action corresponding to the first initial action is selected in the game presentation, the action corresponding to the first initial action is replaced with the action corresponding to the second initial action. will be performed. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the influence on the performance of the game, and to prevent the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, in the initial operation process shown in FIG. 136, if there is a malfunction in the normal initial operation, the malfunction error flag is immediately set and the alternative initial operation is set. If there is a malfunction in the normal initial operation before the setting or the alternative initial operation is set, the normal initial operation or the operation for confirming the malfunction may be performed again as a retry operation. If no malfunction is detected in this retry operation, the operation is assumed to be normal, and the setting of the malfunction error flag and the setting of the alternative initial operation are not performed. Also, when a malfunction is detected in the retry operation, a malfunction error flag is set and an alternative initial operation is set. Since the retry operation is performed, the alternative initial operation need not be performed.

Normal initial operation, special initial operation, retry operation and alternative initial operation are shown in FIGS.
, and when all of the normal initial action, special initial action, retry action, and alternative initial action are completed, the initial action is considered to be the end of the initial action. To determine the execution mode of performance.

Based on the above, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a game is executed in which identification information is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time and then the result is displayed. In a gaming machine that generates a game state, game control means (game control device 100) for overall control of a game, and performance control means (performance control device 300) for controlling game performance based on information from the game control means. , a movable effect device (first lower movable members 740, 74
1, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910, third central movable effect member 920, and a fourth central movable effect member 930), the game control means can hold information even in a power failure state, and can resume the game based on the information held when the power failure is restored. The control means is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device based on restoration of the power failure, and the game control means interrupts the game when a power failure occurs during execution of the game, and when the power failure is restored. The game is restarted, and if a power failure occurs during the execution of the game with a special result and then the power failure is restored, the initial operation of the movable presentation device, which was started along with the restoration of the power failure, is resumed. In the case where the game ends before the end of the game, if no abnormality is detected by the initial action, the effect action of the movable effect device is enabled from the start of the special game state, and the abnormality is detected by the initial action. In this case, the effect operation of the movable effect device is disabled even after the start of the special game state. therefore,
If it can operate normally, the performance operation of the movable performance device can be performed as soon as possible after the power failure is restored, and the decrease in interest in the game can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent inadvertent actions in the restarted game, prevent inconsistencies in presentation, and prevent loss of interest in the game. In addition, in the special game state, it is possible to operate normally, so that it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game. Also, by disabling the operation when there is an abnormality, it is possible to deal with the failure of the game machine.

In addition, when a power failure occurs during the execution of a game with a special result and then the power failure is restored, the effect control means causes the initial operation of the movable effect device, which has started with the restoration of the power failure, to finish before the result is displayed. In this case, if no abnormality is detected by the initial operation, the effect operation of the movable effect device is enabled from the start of the display of the result, and if an abnormality is detected by the initial operation, the result is displayed. Even after the start, the performance operation of the movable performance device is disabled. Therefore, when the initial action ends early, the performance action can be started early, and the interest in the game can be improved. Also, by disabling the operation when there is an abnormality, it is possible to deal with the failure of the game machine.

Further, the effect control means is configured to perform a retry operation when an abnormality is detected in the initial operation, and it is assumed that an abnormality was not detected by the initial operation when an abnormality is not detected in the retry operation. It means that it was made to do. Therefore, it becomes possible to accurately determine the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, as for a movable effect device that exists in different positions depending on the game state, the initial action may not be performed depending on the situation. For example, regarding the probability state, which is one of the game states, in the case of a movable production device whose operation is controlled so that it is in the initial position when it is in a low probability state and is not in its initial position when it is in a high probability state. , Even if it is not in the initial position when the power is turned on, if the production control device 300 can grasp that the probability state is a high probability state, the initial operation including the special initial operation (return operation) is not performed. Then, the movable effect device may be kept at the position as it is. As a result, the game can be restarted quickly by omitting the initial operation.

When it is possible to grasp that the probability state is a high probability state, for example, the game control device 100
When a power failure recovery command is received from the
As the probability state information, there is a case where information indicating a high probability state is received. Conversely, when the RAM initialization command is received, the probability state becomes a low probability state, so if it is not in the initial position, a special initial operation is performed. In addition to the probability state, the game state includes whether or not it is a time saving state, production mode, whether or not it is a latent probability variable state, and the like. When the game state can be grasped for the movable performance devices whose positions are different according to these states, initial motions including special initial motions are not performed, and the movable performance devices are kept at the positions as they are. You can do it.

In addition to not only preventing the initial operation according to the game state, the return priority order may be changed according to the game state. That is, an initial action table corresponding to the game state may be provided. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the first central movable production member 900, the second central movable production member 910, the third central movable production member 920 and the fourth central movable production member 930 are in a high probability state or in a time saving state. In some cases, it is placed at the operation completion position overlapping the front side of the display device 41, and is controlled to temporarily return to the initial position when the reach state develops. In addition, when it is not in the high probability state or in the time saving state, it is arranged at the initial position, and when the reach state develops, it is controlled to temporarily move to the operation completion position. In addition, since it may be arranged at the operation completion position for a long time in this way, each central movable effect member is provided with a magnet on the end face facing the adjacent central movable effect member, and by the attraction force of the magnet It assists each central movable effect member to be maintained at the operation completion position.

When these central movable production members are not in the initial position before the start of the initial action, if it can be grasped that it is in a high probability state or a time saving state, the return priority is set to the lowest,
An initial operation table in which an initial operation corresponding to this return priority is defined is selected. In this case, since each central movable production member does not need to be in the initial position, there is no problem in leaving it as it is. The return priority of the central movable performance member is set to be the lowest.

Also, if it is not possible to grasp that it is in a high probability state or a time saving state, or if it is not in these states (it is a normal probability state and not a time saving state), the return priority will be the highest. , an initial operation table in which an initial operation corresponding to this return priority is defined is selected. In this case, each central movable effect member must be in the initial position, and since each central movable effect member is close to the display device 41 and covers a large area, it is necessary to give priority to the return operation. To give the highest return priority to each central movable performance member.

Also, although the initial operation is always performed when the power is turned on, the initial operation may not be performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, if a power failure restoration command is received when the power is turned on, the power failure is normally restored, so the movable production device is assumed to have no problem and the initial operation is not performed, and when the RAM initialization command is received when the power is turned on. Only the initial operation may be performed.

Also, when a power failure occurs during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game and is restored, the initial operation may be performed in the special figure fluctuation display game that is restarted along with the restoration of the power failure. Also, the initial operation may be performed in the special figure fluctuation display game newly started after power failure recovery.
In this case, the initial action may be performed regardless of the progress of the presentation, or the initial action may be performed in accordance with the progress of the presentation. Further, all the initial actions may be performed in one special figure variation display game, or the initial actions may be distributed over a plurality of special figure variation display games. In the case of performing the initial action corresponding to the progress of the production, a specific production including the operation of the movable production device that can execute the operation as the initial action as the production of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. to In addition, even if a power failure occurs during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game and it is not restored, the initial operation is not performed only on the condition that the power is turned on, but the special figure fluctuation display is performed after the power is turned on. The initial operation may be performed in the special figure variation display game when the game is executed.

Also, as a special initial action for a movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state before the start of the initial action, the movable effect device may join the normal initial action from the position where the movable effect device is stopped. The normal initial operation is an operation to move from the initial position to the maximum operating position and then return to the initial position. Therefore, the movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state before the start of the initial action is in a state of being stopped in the middle of the process of performing the normal initial action. Therefore, among the normal initial motions, the motion from the initial position to the position where the movable effect device is stopped may be omitted, and the rest of the motions may be performed.

In addition, although the detection sensor can detect that the movable effect device is at the initial position, it may be possible to detect that it is at another specific position in addition to the initial position. It may be possible to detect the position over the range, and the mode of the initial operation may be set according to the detected position. Also, the normal detection state is the detection state when the movable effect device is at the initial position, but the detection state when the movable effect device is at the position where it should be when the power is turned on may be the normal detection state. is not necessarily the initial position.

Also, here, the initial operation of the board effect device 44 provided on the game board 30 has been described, but when a movable effect device is provided on the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15, this movable effect device can also be applied. be. Also, although the pachinko game machine has been described, the present invention can also be applied to other game machines such as slot machines as long as they have movable effect devices.

Based on the above, based on the establishment of the starting condition, a game is executed in which the identification information is variably displayed,
In a gaming machine that generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, a movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 84
8, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910
, third central movable production member 920, fourth central movable production member 930), and position detection means capable of detecting the position of the movable production device (first to seventh detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 8
58, 889, 897) and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device, and the effect control means is configured to perform the initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on. When the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation indicates a predetermined normal detection state, the normal initial operation is performed as the initial operation, and the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is normal. If it is not in the detection state, it is possible to perform a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation as the initial operation. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, a plurality of movable effect devices are provided, position detection means corresponding to each of the movable effect devices is provided, and the effect control means is a movable effect in which the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial action is a normal detection state. For the device, a normal initial action is performed as the initial action, and a special initial action may be performed as the initial action instead of the normal initial action for the movable effect device whose detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial action is not in the normal detection state. We have made it possible. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, when all of the detection results by the position detecting means before the start of the initial action are in the normal detection state, the effect control means causes the plurality of movable effect devices to perform the normal initial action in a predetermined order, When at least one of the detection results by the position detection means before the start of the action is not in the normal detection state, the movable effect devices whose detection results by the position detection means are not in the normal detection state are made to perform a special initial action, and then other movable effects are sequentially performed. This means that the production device is initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as interference with other movable effect devices by operating from a movable effect device that is not in a normal position. In addition, by performing the special initial operation one by one, the operation can be confirmed one by one, which makes it easy to grasp the abnormal state.

Further, the position detection means can detect that the movable effect device is at the initial position, and the normal detection state is a state in which the movable effect device is at the initial position.
As a normal initial operation, an operation to return to the initial position after operating from the initial position is performed, and as a special initial operation, only an operation to return to the initial position is performed. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

Also, based on the establishment of the starting condition, a game is executed in which the identification information is variably displayed, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state is generated in which a predetermined game value is awarded to the player. In the machine, a plurality of movable effect devices that perform a predetermined effect action, position detection means capable of detecting the position of each movable effect device, effect control means for controlling the operation of the movable effect device,
The effect control means is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device based on the power-on, and if more than one of the detection results by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is not in the normal detection state, the position As a result of the detection by the detecting means, the movable effect devices which are not in the normal detection state are operated so as to be in the normal detection state one by one. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the abnormal state of the gaming machine.

In addition, a display device 41 for displaying a game-related effect is provided, and the effect control means causes the movable effect devices, which are not in the normal detection state as detected by the position detection means, to enter the normal detection state one by one. The operation is performed according to a predetermined order so that the movable effect device close to the device 41 is operated first. Therefore, it is possible to quickly resolve the situation that hinders the visibility of the display. As a result, the timing at which the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41 becomes visible is earlier, and the game can be resumed earlier, and the timing at which the abnormality notification on the display device 41 becomes visible is also earlier. can be grasped quickly.

Further, the effect control means is determined in advance so as not to interfere with other movable effect devices when moving the movable effect devices, which are not in the normal detection state as detected by the position detection means, to the normal detection state one by one. This means that the operations are performed according to the order specified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of interfering with other movable effect devices due to the action.

Further, a display device 41 is provided for displaying effects related to games, and the effect control means can display on the display device 41 a decoration variable display game in which a plurality of identification symbols are variably displayed in correspondence with the game and then the result mode is stopped and displayed. When the movable effect devices whose detection result by the position detection means is not in the normal detection state are brought into the normal detection state one by one, the movable effect devices having a large range overlapping with the display area of the decoration variation display game are operated first. It means that the operation is performed according to the predetermined order. Therefore, the situation that hinders the visibility of the game can be quickly resolved.

In addition, a display device 41 for displaying a game-related effect is provided, and the effect control means causes the movable effect devices, which are not in the normal detection state as detected by the position detection means, to enter the normal detection state one by one. The operation is performed according to a predetermined order so that the movable effect device having a large overlapping range with the device 41 is operated first. Therefore, it is possible to quickly solve the situation that hinders the visibility of the display (decorative special figure fluctuation display game, anomaly notification, etc.).

Next, an effect on the display device 41 will be described. First, the display on the display device 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 149(a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a decoration special figure variation display game display section 85 for displaying the first decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display games is provided. Here, the decoration special figure variable display game is displayed by stopping after the identification information is variably displayed in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas. In the upper left part of the display area,
A second decoration game display section 88 is provided for displaying the second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game. The second ornament game displayed in the second ornament game display section 88 has left, middle, and right areas in the same manner as the first ornament game displayed in the ornament special figure variation display game display section 85. After displaying the identification information in a variable manner, it stops and displays the results.

In addition, a memory display section 83 for displaying a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory is provided at the lower center of the display area. The memory display portion 83 is provided with a first memory display portion 83a that displays the first starting memory and a second memory display portion 83b that displays the second starting memory. The decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the first memory display unit 83a corresponds to the first start memory one by one,
They are displayed side by side in order of memory, and here, it indicates that there are four first starting memories. The decoration special figure start memory display of the left end is the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the 1st start memory memorized first, and is designed to shift to the left each time it is digested.

In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to each starting memory and the result of the look-ahead such as the variation pattern by the display mode. Also, the second storage display unit 83
In b, the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the second starting memory and one-to-one is displayed in the same manner as the first memory display section 83a. Here, it indicates that there are three second starting memories.

On the left side of the first memory display section 83a, there is provided an in-execution memory display section 84 for displaying information on starting memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed. This in-execution storage display section 8
4, at the start of the special figure variation display game, the first memory display section 83a or the second memory display section 83b
The decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of is shifted, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed and the fluctuation pattern etc. are suggested by the display mode.

A starting memory number display section 86 for displaying the number of starting memories is provided in the upper right part of the display area. This starting memory number display section 86 has a first starting memory number display section 86a for displaying the number of first starting memories.
and a second start memory number display portion 86b for displaying the number of second start memories. In addition, an effect mode display section 89 for displaying the current effect mode is provided in the upper center of the display area. Here, it has shown that it is the time-saving mode which is the mode in a time-saving state. Furthermore, in the time saving state, a remaining number display section 73 is provided to indicate the remaining number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state. The number-of-remaining-number display portion 73 constitutes one of numerical displays for numerically displaying game information whose numerical value changes as the game progresses.

Next, the update of the numerical value display that displays the game information whose numerical value changes as the game progresses will be described. The game information whose numerical value changes as the game progresses includes the number of starting memories, the remaining number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the time saving state, the specific game state or the special figure fluctuation display that was executed regardless of the game state For example, the number of games played. In addition, the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed until the special figure variation display game is executed based on the specific start memory, the time until the occurrence of a specific event, the points that can be acquired according to the game, the number of game balls fired , the number of prizes won, the number of prize balls, and the like. In addition, the number of rounds in the special game state, the number of consecutive residences that is the number of times the special result has been derived during the time saving state from the derivation of the special result in the state that is not in the time saving state, and the decoration during the execution of one special figure fluctuation display game The number of executions of re-variation in the so-called pseudo continuous pattern that performs temporary stop and re-variation in the special figure fluctuation display game. Regarding the game information whose numerical value changes as the game progresses, it is possible to display the numerical value display on the display device 41 by displaying the numerical value.

In FIG. 149(a), the number of starting memories is displayed numerically in the starting memory number display section 86. In FIG. In addition, the remaining number of times of the special figure fluctuation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is displayed by the remaining number of times display unit 7
3 are indicated by numerical values. The numerical value display in the remaining number display section 73 consists of numerical information indicating the numerical value and additional information indicating the content of the numerical value. For example, the remaining number display section 73 shown in FIG. constitutes numeric information, and the "remainder" and "time" portions constitute additional information. Numerical information and additional information are arranged in different layers when the VDP 312 constructs an image, and when updating numerical values, only the numerical information layer needs to be updated.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 149(b) to (j), the number of executions of the special figure variation display game until the special figure variation display game based on a specific starting memory is executed as a prefetch effect is displayed by the notice display unit 7.
4 can be displayed by numerical display. This numerical display is the game control device 100
The numerical value will be set based on the read-ahead command from.

As shown in FIG. 149(b), when a new second start memory is generated during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and the second start memory becomes a notice target, the notice display section 74 displays "4 more chances left. times” is displayed. Here, an advance notice effect is also performed in which the display mode of the starting memory display corresponding to the target starting memory is changed in the second starting memory number display section 86b. Advance notice display section 7
The display of 4 also consists of numeric information indicating a numerical value (“4” in FIG. 149(b)) and additional information indicating the content of the numerical value (“until chance”, “times”).

When the result is displayed as shown in FIG. 149(c) and the special figure variation display game ends, FIG.
As shown in 49(d), a new special figure variation display game is started based on the second start memory.
In the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85, the variation display of the identification information is started in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas. A variable display of the identification information is started. Furthermore, a display is performed in which the decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end of the second memory display section 83b flows into the running memory display section 84, and at the same time, the starting memory number display section 86, which is one of the numerical displays The numerical value of the second start memory number display portion 86b is decreased by one.

At this time, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 86b is displayed in an enlarged manner so that it is easy to understand that it is being updated. Enlarged display is to display a numerical value to be updated larger than when it is not updated, but may be displayed to be larger than other numerical values. At this stage, the display of the remaining number of times display section 73 and the display of the advance notice display section 74, which are other numerical displays, are not updated.

When the updating of the starting memory number display section 86, which is one of the numerical displays, is completed, the display of the advance notice display section 74 is updated as shown in FIG. 149(e). At this time, the advance notice display portion 74 is displayed in an enlarged manner so that it is easy to understand that it is being updated. Furthermore, when the update of the advance notice display portion 74, which is one of the numerical displays, is completed, the display of the remaining count display portion 73 is updated as shown in FIG. 149(f). At this time, the remaining count display portion 73 is displayed in an enlarged manner so that it is easy to understand that it has been updated. When these numerical displays are updated, other numerical displays are not updated at the same time.

After that, even when executing the special figure fluctuation display game based on two consecutive second start memories
The numerical display is updated in the same manner as in 49(d) to (f). Similarly, when starting the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be the notice target, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is displayed as shown in FIG. As shown in (h), the start memory number display section 86 and the memory display section 83 are updated. Here, the memory display section 83 provides a read-ahead effect by changing the display mode, and the in-execution memory display section 84 is also in a state where an advance notice is given according to the display mode.

When the update of the starting memory number display portion 86, which is one of the numerical displays, is completed, the display of the advance notice display portion 74 is updated as shown in FIG. 149(i). Here, since the special figure variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game for which the notice is to be given, the numerical value is 0, so the numerical value display is terminated, and only the notice display for the special figure variation display game being executed is displayed. conduct. Furthermore, when the update of the advance notice display portion 74, which is one of the numerical displays, is completed, the display of the remaining count display portion 73 is updated as shown in FIG. 149(j).

In this way, when a plurality of numerical values are displayed on the display device 41, by making the update timings of the respective values different, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the update of the display. In particular, Figure 1
As shown in 49, when the timing of updating multiple numerical displays is the same (here, the start of the special figure fluctuation display game), the timing of each update is different, so that it is updated at the same time. It is possible to easily grasp the update of the display that was previously displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 149, the update timing is different for all numerical displays,
A part of numerical displays among a plurality of numerical displays may be updated at the same time, and the numerical displays that are desired to be updated by the player may not be updated at the same time. For example, the remaining count display portion 73 and the advance notice display portion 74 are updated at the same time, but the starting memory count display portion 86 may not be updated at the same time. In addition, although a plurality of numerical displays are prevented from being updated at the same time, it is also possible to make only the updating start timings different. For example, after starting to update one numerical display, updating of another numerical display may be started before the update is completed. In other words, the update should be started sequentially.

Also, when updating multiple numerical displays with the same update timing, the numerical displays waiting to be updated have different values from the actual numerical values, but this is a short period of time, so there is no problem. However, a display may be made to prevent misrecognition of the player. For example, a specific display may be added as a display indicating waiting for update, or the display mode of numerical display may be changed. Also, for example, in the period until the update of the numerical display from FIG. It may also be displayed and displayed in a variable manner after all updates are completed.

Moreover, although the case where it is a time-saving state was demonstrated here as an example, even when it is not a time-saving state, several numerical display can be displayed. When the time saving state is not set, the remaining number display section 73 is not displayed, but the notice display section 74 and the starting memory number display section 86 can be displayed. In addition, numerical values can be displayed for other items whose numerical values change as the game progresses.

FIG. 150 shows another aspect of the display of the advance notice display section 74. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 150(a), a new second starting memory is generated during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and when the second starting memory becomes a notice target, a time value is displayed on the notice display section 74. be. This time value is the time until the result is derived in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory to be notified, and here is 10
. 00 seconds. Numerical information indicating numerical values (
In FIG. 150(a), it consists of "10", "00") and additional information (":") indicating the content of the numerical value.

It should be noted that at the time of the start of the notice, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game based on each starting memory has not been determined, so the time value here is an approximate value, and the time value will be corrected as appropriate according to the progress of the game. . In the performance control device 300, it is possible to grasp the variation time of the special figure variation display game based on the information of the variation pattern command transmitted at the start of the special figure variation display game, and based on this, the time value is corrected.

As shown in FIG. 150(b), the time value in the notice display unit 74 also decreases with the passage of time, and when the result is displayed and the special figure fluctuation display game ends, the second as shown in FIG. 150(c) 2 A new special figure variation display game is started based on the start memory. In addition, in the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85, the variation display of the identification information is started in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas. Each starts to display identification information on a variable basis. Furthermore, a display is performed in which the decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end of the second memory display section 83b flows into the running memory display section 84, and at the same time, the starting memory number display section 8 which is one of the numerical displays
At 6, the numerical value of the second start memory number display portion 86b is decreased by one. At this time, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 86b is displayed in an enlarged manner so that it is easy to understand that it is being updated. In addition, during the period in which the start memory number display section 86 is updated, the display of the remaining number display section 73, which is another numerical display, is not updated, and the update of the time value of the notice display section 74 is stopped. It is said that

When the updating of the starting memory number display section 86, which is one of the numerical displays, is completed, the display of the remaining number of times display section 73 is updated as shown in FIG. 150(d). At this time, the remaining count display portion 73 is displayed in an enlarged manner so that it is easy to understand that it has been updated. Even during the period in which the remaining count display section 73 is updated, the update of the time value on the notice display section 74 is stopped. When the remaining count display section 73 is updated, the notice display section 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. 150(e).
Updating the time value at 4 is resumed. At this time, the time value (8.65 seconds in FIG. 150(d)) displayed with the update stopped is updated to a value obtained by subtracting the time during which the update was stopped (FIG. 150 7.56 seconds in (e)) and start an update subtracting the time value from it. When the time value of this advance notice display section 74 is being updated, other numerical displays are not updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 150(f), when the time value of the notice display section 74 becomes 0 seconds, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the notice object is derived. A special result is derived here. Here, the time value until the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is derived based on the starting memory of the notice target is shown in the notice display unit 74, but it is not limited to this, and the reach state occurrence and specific It is sufficient if it displays the time value until the occurrence of a specific event such as the start timing of the effect.

In this example as well, when a plurality of numerical values are displayed on the display device 41, the updating timing of each is made different so that the player can easily grasp the updating of the display. Note that the notice display section 74 is not updated while the starting memory number display section 86 and the remaining number display section 73 are being updated. Since the update of the time value of the display unit 74 is different in timing of update and interval of update, it is difficult to confuse the two. You may make it update the part 74. FIG.

In addition, when the numerical value of the remaining count display portion 73 and the numerical value display in which the numerical value decreases due to updating, such as the numerical value in the advance notice display portion 74, are displayed at the same time, the numerical value decreases due to any update trigger. However, by making the update timings different as described above, it is possible to prevent such a problem from occurring. The same applies to the case where any one of a plurality of numerical displays increases in numerical value due to updating. In the above example, the display of the starting memory number display part 86 whose numerical value increases or decreases due to updating is also included, but such a starting memory number display part 86 is not displayed,
All displayed numerical values may be increased or decreased as the game progresses. Also, when two numerical displays are displayed, if one numerical display is updated to increase the numerical value and the other numerical display is updated to decrease the numerical value, the mutual numerical display can be easily updated. become identifiable.

Also, a sound may be emitted when the numerical display is updated. In this case, different sounds may be emitted depending on the numerical display to be updated. Also, the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46 may be caused to emit light when the numerical display is updated. In this case, the lighting mode may be changed depending on the numerical display to be updated.

[Numerical value display update process]
FIG. 151 shows the numeric display updating process performed in the effect display editing process (step C13) in the main process (see FIG. 119) in the effect control device 300. FIG. In this numerical display updating process, it is first determined whether numerical display is being performed (step C521), and if numerical display is not being performed (step C521; N), the numerical display updating process is terminated. again,
If numerical values are being displayed (step C521; Y), it is determined whether the numerical values of the game information being numerically displayed have been updated (step C522).

If the numerical value has not been updated (step C522; N), the process proceeds to step C524. If the numerical value is updated (step C522; Y), the update flag of the target numerical display is set, and it is determined whether there is any numerical display being updated (step C524). At this point, the numerical value of the game information has been updated, but the corresponding numerical value display has not yet been updated.

Then, it is determined whether there is a numerical display being updated (step C524), and if there is a numerical display being updated (step C524; Y), the numerical display updating process is terminated. In other words, multiple numerical displays are prevented from being updated at the same time. If there is no numeric display being updated (step C524; N), among the numeric displays with update flags, those with higher priority are updated (step C525), and the update flags of the updated numeric displays are cleared. (Step C52
6) End the numerical value display updating process.

The order of priority may be set in advance for all of the numerical displays that can be displayed, or may be set relatively among the numerical displays being displayed. In addition, the priority order may be changed as appropriate, for example, change in game state such as time saving state or high probability state, or change according to the effect content or result of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is possible.

FIG. 152 shows a display mode when the value of the remaining count display section 73 is decreased as an example of the display mode when the value of the numerical display is decreased. As shown in FIG. 152(a), the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is 5 times, and as shown in FIG. 152(b), the special figure variation display game ends, and FIG. As shown in (c), when the next special figure variation display game is started, the starting memory number display section 86 is first updated.

When the remaining count display section 73 is updated, the value after the update becomes 4 or less, which is the upper limit value of one of the starting memories. It is considered as a mode. At this time, as shown in FIG. 152(d), the remaining count display section 73 is displayed in the center of the display area so that it is farther from the starting memory count display section 86 than the previous display position. A frame line surrounding the remaining count display portion 73 is displayed so as to partition the area. The numerical value is updated in such a different display mode, and then the remaining count display section 73 is erased as shown in FIG. 152(e).

During the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game, the remaining number display section 73 is not displayed, the special figure fluctuation display game ends as shown in FIG. When the figure fluctuation display game is started and the update timing of the remaining count display portion 73 comes, as shown in FIG. 152(h), the remaining count display portion 73 is displayed and the numerical value is updated. After that, FIG. 152(j)
As shown in , the remaining count display section 73 is erased again. After that, the same display is performed when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is two times and once.

In this way, by making the display mode different when the displayed numerical value is equal to or less than the upper limit of the starting memory number, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the displayed numerical value with the starting memory number.
In particular, when the value of the numerical display becomes equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of starting memories, the confusion of the player can be effectively prevented by not displaying the numerical display except at the time of updating.

In addition, the number of numerical display is set to 4, which is the upper limit of one of the starting memories, and the display mode of the numerical display is different, but the sum of the upper limit of the starting memory of special figure 1 and special figure 2 It is also possible to change the display mode of the numerical display with the value of 8 as a boundary. In this embodiment, since the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed, the game progresses mainly with the special figure 1 variation display game other than the time saving state, and the special figure in the time saving state The game progresses mainly with the 2-variation display game. Therefore, since the upper limit value of the starting memory that the player is conscious of is the upper limit value of one starting memory, the display mode of the numerical display is made different with this upper limit value as a boundary. In the case of a gaming machine that executes the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game in the order of occurrence of the starting memory, the upper limit of the starting memory that the player is conscious of is the upper limit of the starting memory of special figure 1 and special figure 2 Since the value is 8, which is the total value of the values, in this case, it is preferable to change the display mode of the numerical display with 8 as a boundary.

In addition, since the purpose is to prevent the player from confusing the numerical value of the numerical display with the number of starting memories, the display mode is designed to prevent confusion at least when the numerical value is equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of starting memories. The boundary for changing the display mode may be a value larger than the upper limit value of the starting memory.

Moreover, the display mode is not limited to that shown in FIG. 152, and the display mode may be different before and after the numerical value of the numerical display reaches a predetermined value. The different elements include the display position, display size, display color, display angle, presence/absence of a frame line that divides the display area, and the like. Further, the target for which the display mode is to be changed is not limited to the display on the remaining count display section 73, and may be for all numerical displays.

FIG. 153 shows another aspect of numerical display. In this example, as shown in FIG. 153(a), the remaining number of times display section 73 displays a time value. As shown in FIG. 153(b), in the advance notice display portion 74, which is a numerical display for displaying the time value until the occurrence of a specific event, the value is displayed so as to decrease sequentially along with the passage of time. By determining the variable time of the special figure variable display game based on the starting memory, if there is a difference between the displayed time value and the actual time value, it will be the actual time value Modifications may be made, in which case the time values may be discontinuous.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 153(b), the remaining number display unit 73, which displays the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state by the display simulating the time value, displays the numerical value in units of seconds. is designed to display the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game that can be executed in the time saving state, 1
The value in units of /100 seconds is changed for decoration. For example, 75:00
The display of ~75:99 indicates that the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is 75 times. The display in units of 1/100 changes so as to increase in order opposite to the display on the advance notice display unit 74, and 75:99 at the timing when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is not updated. When it becomes , it returns to 75:00 next time.

Also, at the timing when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is updated, the numerical value in units of seconds is subtracted. At this time, the display in units of 1/100 is inherited as it is. For example, in the state of 75:02 display, when it comes time to update the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state, next 74
: 03 is displayed. Note that the unit of 1/100 may be reset to 00 to become 74:00.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, effect control for controlling the effect of the game means (effect control device 300), and a display device 41 capable of displaying game information, which is information related to a game, under the control of the effect control means, and the effect control means includes a plurality of display devices whose numerical values change as the game progresses. For each of the game information, numerical displays for displaying numbers corresponding to the numerical values can be simultaneously displayed on the display device 41, and when one numerical display is updated, the other numerical displays are not updated. It will happen. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp the update of each numerical value display, the player's attention can be attracted, and the information can be reliably grasped, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Also, the effect control means makes the updating intervals of the numerical display corresponding to the plurality of pieces of game information different from each other. Therefore, it becomes easier to grasp the update of each numerical display.

In addition, the effect control means also displays additional information that makes it possible to identify which game information the numerical value display corresponds to. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp the content of each numerical display.

In addition, the effect control means, regarding a plurality of game information displayed numerically on the display device 41,
As the game progresses, all numerical values are displayed so as to increase or all numerical values to decrease. Therefore, it becomes easier to predict changes in each numerical display.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, an effect control means for controlling the effect of the game; and a display device 41 capable of displaying game information, which is information related to a game, under the control of the effect control means. The numerical display to be displayed can be displayed on the display device 41, and the display mode of the numerical display is changed when the numerical value becomes a predetermined value. Therefore, the display mode can be changed to attract the player's attention and allow the player to grasp the information with certainty, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

In addition, start storage means (game control device 100) for storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories that become the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning area (start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). and the predetermined value is equal to or greater than the upper limit. Therefore, the display mode can be changed, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent confusion between the numeric display and the starting memory display.

Also, the effect control means can display the starting memory display indicating the number of starting memories on the display device 41, and when updating the starting memory display, the numeric display is not updated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent confusion between the numeric display and the starting memory display.

Further, the game information has a numerical value that decreases as the game progresses. Numerical display will not be displayed continuously. Therefore, the display mode can be changed, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, by setting the predetermined value to a value equal to or higher than the upper limit value of the starting memory, it is possible to prevent confusion between the numerical display and the starting memory display.

Next, a description will be given of a character effect for displaying characters corresponding to a sound generated as a game effect. In this character presentation, sounds including lines are emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b,
A character display 75 is displayed on the display device 41 in which the words are displayed in characters.

As shown in FIG. 154(a), the variation display is performed in the decoration special figure variation display game, and the board decoration device 46 having the LED is turned off in the state before reaching the ready-to-win state.
Further, the display area is divided into two areas, a first display area 77 and a second display area 78, here. In the first display area, the variable display is performed by the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85, and in the second display area 78, the expectation degree is indicated by the number of stars as an effect corresponding to the decoration special figure variation display game. It is By partitioning the display areas in this manner and performing different effects in each area, it becomes possible to execute a variety of effects, and the interest in the game can be improved.

During the period before the ready-to-win state occurs when the variable display is performed in the decorative special figure variable display game, it is possible to execute the character effects shown in FIGS. 154(b) to (d). In this character presentation, the speaker 19a, 19b emits a voice saying "If you can do it, try it."
The character display 75 of "If you can do it, try it" is produced. In addition, the color of the character display 75 indicates the degree of expectation for the special result, and the degree of expectation is indicated in the order of blue, green, and red.

When the character effect is started, first, as shown in FIG. 154(b), sounds are output from the speakers 19a and 19b and blue character display 75 is performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 154(g), the board decoration device 46 emits blue light in accordance with the character display 75 in blue. In the second display area 78, two stars are displayed to indicate the degree of expectation as the blue character effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 154(c), the color of the character display 75 can be changed to green. A specific sound is output at the time of this color change. 154 (
As shown in g), the board decoration device 46 emits green light in accordance with the green character display 75 .

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 154(d), the color of character display 75 can be changed to red. A specific sound is output at the time of this color change. Further, as shown in FIG. 154(g), the board decoration device 46 emits red light in accordance with the red character display 75. FIG. In the second display area 78, four stars are displayed as the red character effect is executed, suggesting that the degree of expectation has increased. Note that the change in color of the character display 75 is based on the degree of expectation suggested, and there are cases where the color remains blue and does not change, and there are cases where the color changes to green. In addition, although a specific sound is output when changing the color of the character display 75, the same sound as the sound output when the display of the character display 75 is started (here, "Try it if you can do it") is output. can be

After that, as shown in FIG. 154(e), the normal reach state is reached. At this time, the second
In the display area 78, five stars are displayed to indicate that expectations have increased. Then, normal reach develops into SP reach, and as shown in FIG. 154(f), character effects are performed in reach effects. In the character presentation during this ready-to-win presentation, the speaker 19a, 19b emits a voice saying "Well done, you've come this far", and a character display 75 of "Well done, you've come so far" is displayed. In addition, the color of the character display 75 indicates the degree of expectation for the special result, and the degree of expectation is indicated in the order of blue, green, and red. However, as shown in FIG. 154(g), the emission color of the board decoration device 46 is white regardless of the color of the displayed characters.

Further, as shown in FIG. 154(f), the second display area 78 is erased and only the first display area 77 is left as the SP reach progresses. As a result, the SP ready-to-win effect can be executed in the entire display area, and a powerful effect can be performed in a wide display area, thereby enhancing the interest in the SP ready-to-win which is highly likely to result in a special result. can be significantly increased.

Here, the display mode of the character display 75 in the character effect differs depending on whether the period is in the reach state or not. The character display 75 in the character presentation in the non-reach state has a first display mode, in which the characters are arranged along non-horizontal lines and arranged not along the periphery of the display area. Moreover, it is displayed so as to overlap the identification information displayed at a position near the center of the display area and variably displayed by the decoration special figure variability display game display section 85 . Furthermore, the character display is displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side of the character 76 . In addition, the size of the characters is not constant and is displayed stereoscopically (three-dimensionally) so that some of the characters overlap. In addition, it is possible to have multiple columns of character strings.

On the other hand, the character display 75 in the character presentation in the reach state has the second display mode, in which the characters are arranged along the horizontal line and along the periphery of the display area. again,
It is displayed farther from the center of the display area than the character display 75 during the non-reach state. Further, the character display 75 is displayed in front of the character 76 so as not to overlap. In addition, the size of the characters is fixed and displayed two-dimensionally, and the characters do not overlap each other. In addition, the characters are displayed in smaller characters than the character display 75 during the non-reach state. Also, the character string is in one line.

Since the character performance is the main part during the period when the reach state is not reached, the character display 75 is set in a display mode in which the character display 75 stands out in order to give the effect of the performance by the character display 75, thereby improving the amusement of the game. In particular, the period in which the player is not in the ready-to-reach state is the period in which the player stays the longest while playing the game, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game by increasing the interest in the presentation during this period. In addition, during the reach state period, the character display 7 is executed as a part of the reach effect such as the character image.
5 is made less conspicuous than the period in which the ready-to-win state is not performed so as not to interfere with the ready-to-win effect.

By making the subject of the performance different depending on whether or not it is in the ready-to-win state, the performance can be different and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, by making the execution mode different depending on the execution timing even for the same character presentation, it is possible to enrich the variation of the character presentation and improve the amusement of the game.

When the display mode of the character display 75 in the character effect is changed depending on whether or not the ready-to-reach state is set, an image of the first display mode is prepared in advance for the character effect to be executed in a state other than the ready-to-reach state. The character effect executed in can be realized by preparing an image in the second display mode. In addition, the character effect to be executed regardless of whether the game is in the ready-to-reach state is executed by selecting either the first display mode or the second display mode according to the timing of execution.

Note that the difference in the display mode of the character display 75 depending on whether or not it is a period in the reach state is not limited to the one described above, and may include only a part of the above-described differences. In addition to the differences described above, the font of characters may be different, or the number of characters that can be displayed may be different.

Furthermore, depending on whether the period is in the reach state or not, it may be determined whether or not to set a character information display area that distinguishes the character information display area from other display areas by partitioning the character information display area. For example, when it is not in the reach state, the text information display area is not set and the text information is directly superimposed on the background image.In the reach state, the text information display area is set and the text information is displayed in the text information display area. do. For example, the character information display area is filled with black, and the character information is displayed in a color other than black to provide a caption-like display. Also, the character information display area may be displayed even when it is not in the reach state, and the color of the character information display area may be different depending on whether it is the period in the reach state or not, or the period in the reach state. The combination of the color of the character information display area and the color of the character information may be different depending on whether or not.

In addition, although the display mode is differentiated depending on whether or not the period is in the reach state, the display mode may be varied depending on whether or not the character display 75 is mainly used, and the reference is not limited to the reach state. . For example, in the normal reach period of the reach state period and the reach state, the character display 75 is displayed as shown in FIG. 154 (b) to (d), and in the SP reach period that develops from the normal reach, FIG. You may make it display the character display 75 like. Further, the display mode of the character display 75 may be changed based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player. For example, even during the period during which the character display 75 as shown in FIG.
In the case of the effect based on the operation of 9, the character display 75 as shown in FIGS.
may be temporarily changed to the display mode of .

Alternatively, the sounds emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b may be sounds that do not include words, and the onomatopoeic words of the sounds may be displayed as characters. For example, the sound of a bell may be emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b, and "Kang" may be displayed as a character display. In addition, the second display mode may not suggest the degree of expectation by the color of the characters, and may not have the function of giving advance notice. That is, the first display mode may be used when the function of advance notice is provided, and the second display mode may be used when the function of notice is not provided.

Further, the display mode of the character display 75 may be changed according to the game state such as the special game state, the high probability state, and the time saving state. Also, the display mode of the character display 75 may be changed according to the effect mode selectable by the player or the effect mode selected by the gaming machine. Also, although the color of the character display 75 and the luminous color of the board decoration device 46 are made synchronous, the luminous color of the frame decoration device 18 may be made synchronous.

Further, when the display area is the first display area 77 only, the effect performed in the second display area 78 may continue to be performed in the first display area 77 . In addition, although the effect in the second display area 78 indicates the level of expectation of the special figure variation display game being executed, other effects may be used. For example, the memory display unit 83 may perform a look-ahead effect. Also, the second decoration game display section 88 may be displayed in the second display area 78 . Also, although the first display area 77 and the second display area 78 are partitioned by the partition line, the partition line may not be displayed to indicate a clear boundary.

In addition, the display area is set to the first display area 77 in the non-reach state period and the normal reach period.
and the second display area 78, and only the first display area 77 is used in the SP reach, but the division of the display area is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily set. for example,
Only the first display area 77 is used during the period of temporary stop and re-fluctuation in the so-called pseudo continuous pattern in which temporary stop and re-fluctuation are performed in the decoration special-figure fluctuation display game during execution of one special figure fluctuation display game, and other periods may be divided into a first display area 77 and a second display area 78 . After the last temporary stop and re-change in the pseudo-continuous pattern are completed, the number of times of temporary stop and re-change may be displayed in the second display area.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, effect control for controlling the effect of the game Means (effect control device 300), and a display device 41 capable of displaying a game-related effect controlled by the effect control means, the effect control means can display character information on the display device 41 as a game-related effect. Thus, the character information is displayed differently depending on whether it is in the reach state or not. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the performance various.

In addition, the effect control means can display the character information along a non-horizontal line during the non-reach state period, and display the character information along the horizontal line during the reach state period. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the performance various. In addition, when the game is not in the ready-to-reach state, the character information becomes conspicuous and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, when it is in the ready-to-win state, it is possible not to interfere with the ready-to-win production.

Speakers 19a and 19b capable of emitting sound under the control of the production control means
, and the effect control means can display characters corresponding to sounds emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b as character information. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the content of the emitted sound.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, an effect control means for controlling the effect of the game; A display device 41 capable of displaying an effect related to a game under the control of the effect control means, and a light emitting means (the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46) capable of emitting light under the control of the effect control means, and the effect control means. , character information can be displayed on the display device 41 as an effect related to the game, and the light emitting means can be caused to emit light, and the color of the character information and the light emission color of the light emitting means are set to the same color during the period when the reach state is not reached. In the period of the reach state, the color of the character information and the light emission color of the light emitting means are set to different colors. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the performance various.

Speakers 19a and 19b capable of emitting sound under the control of the production control means
, and the effect control means can change the color of the character information displayed on the display device 41, and emit sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b in response to changing the color of the character information. I did it. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the change in the color of the character information.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modified example can resume the initial operation interrupted by the power failure after the power failure is restored.

The game machine of this modified example is provided with storage means capable of holding storage contents even in the event of a power failure in the effect control device 300 . The storage means capable of retaining the memory contents even in the event of a power failure may be composed of a non-volatile RAM such as FeRAM 323 that can retain the memory contents even if power is not supplied. Even if it is a volatile RAM 322 that cannot hold the game control device 10
0, it may be configured so that the storage contents can be retained even in the event of a power failure by supplying power from the backup power supply.

The storage means capable of holding the stored contents even in the event of a power failure can store at least the information of the initial motion and the operating state of the movable effect device in the initial motion. If a power failure occurs during execution of the initial operation and the initial operation is interrupted, the interrupted initial operation can be resumed after the power is restored.

[Initial operation processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, instead of the initial operation process shown in FIG. 136, the initial operation process shown in FIG. 155 is performed. In this initial operation process, first, it is determined whether there is a power-on flag (step C121). In the gaming machine of this modification, the effect control device 30
Processing to save the initial value at power-on in the area to be initialized at 0 (step C7)
sets the power-on flag without setting the initial operation flag. i.e.
The power-on flag is a flag that is set based on power-on. If there is no power-on flag (step C121; N), the process proceeds to step C101. If there is a power-on flag (step C121; Y), it is determined whether the backup information is valid (step C122).

For storage means capable of retaining stored contents even in the event of a power failure, processing is performed to determine whether the stored contents (backup information) are correct when the power is turned on.
Similar to the processing in the game control device 100, this determination method includes comparing checksums at power-off and power-on. If the backup information is valid, the information stored in the RAM is used as it is, and if the backup information is not valid, the RA
M is initialized. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as validity determination means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means (RAM 322, FeRAM 323) is valid when power is restored.

If the backup information is valid (step C122; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an in-initialization flag (step C124). Then, if there is an initial operation in-execution flag (step C124; Y), the process proceeds to step C109. In this case, a power failure occurs during execution of the initial operation and the initial operation is interrupted. Since the information before the occurrence of the power failure is correctly held in the storage means, this information is used as it is to restart the interrupted initial operation after the power failure is restored. Also, if there is no initial operation in-execution flag (step C124; N), the initial operation flag is set (step C125). In this case, the power failure occurred when the initial operation was not being executed, and the initial operation is performed based on the current power-on.

On the other hand, if the backup information is not valid (step C122; N), the initial operation execution flag is cleared (step C123), and the initial operation flag is set (step C1
25). In this case, since the information before the power failure occurred is not correctly retained in the memory means, even if the power failure occurred during the execution of the initial operation and the initial operation was interrupted, the initial operation is set to start again. do. If it is determined that the backup information is not valid in the process of checking the validity of the backup information, the contents stored in the storage means are initialized. may be set.

As backup information, the time when the power is turned off is stored based on the information of the RTC 338, and compared with the time when the power is turned on, the time when the power is turned off can be obtained. The interrupted initial operation can be resumed when the cutoff time is less than the predetermined time, and the initial operation is restarted from the beginning when the power cutoff time is longer than the predetermined time even if the backup information is valid. can be

Based on the above, based on the establishment of the starting condition, a game is executed in which the identification information is variably displayed,
In a gaming machine that generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, a movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 84
8, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910
, 3rd central movable production member 920, 4th central movable production member 930), production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable production device, and the production control means, and the stored content even at the time of power failure and a storage means (RAM 322, FeRAM 323) capable of holding, the effect control means is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on, information on the initial operation and the movable effect device in the initial operation The operating state of the can be stored in the storage means,
If a power failure occurs during execution of the initial operation and the initial operation is interrupted, the interrupted initial operation can be resumed after the power is restored. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, position detection means capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device (first to seventh detection sensors 781,
782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897), and the effect control means includes validity determination means (effect control device 300 ), and when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid, the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is in a predetermined normal detection state. In the case of , the normal initial operation is performed as the initial operation,
If the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is not in the normal detection state, it is possible to perform a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation as the initial operation. I did it. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modified example can set the initial action according to the amount of movement required for the return action.

[Initial operation processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, instead of the initial operation process shown in FIG. 136, the initial operation process shown in FIG. 156 is performed. In this initial operation process, if there is an initial operation in-execution flag (step C1
08; Y), that is, when the initial action is being executed, it is determined whether it is time to complete the special initial action (step C131). The completion timing of the special initial operation is the timing at which the detection sensor enters the normal detection state due to the special initial operation of returning to the initial position. When the special initial action is performed for a plurality of movable effect devices, it is the timing when the detection sensor for each movable effect device is in the normal detection state.

If it is not the completion timing of the special initial operation (step C131; N), step C1
09. Moreover, when it is the completion timing of the special initial operation (step C131;
Y) determines whether the amount of movement to the initial position is greater than or equal to a predetermined amount (step C132).
. For detection of the amount of movement, the number of steps required for the stepping motor that operates the movable effect device to return the movable effect device to the initial position can be used. Alternatively, the amount of movement may be detected based on the time taken to return to the initial position.

If the amount of movement to the initial position is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount (step C132; Y), the process proceeds to step C109. In this case, since there is a sufficient amount of movement in the returning motion, and the motion of the movable effect device can be confirmed by this returning motion, further initial motion of the movable effect device is omitted as in the first embodiment. If the amount of movement to the initial position is not equal to or greater than the predetermined amount (step C132; N), the normal initial action for the movable effect device is set (step C133). In this case, the amount of movement in the return motion is not sufficient, and the normal initial motion of the movable effect device is set to be performed again.

For example, when the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770 are not at the initial positions, the initial operation table of FIG. 146(b) is set in the process of step C106. . Then, first, the special initial motion of the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 is performed, and at the timing when this special initial motion is completed, it is determined whether or not the amount of movement to the initial position is a predetermined amount or more. .

If the amount of movement until the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are returned to the initial position is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, the initial operation table of FIG. 146(b) is used as it is. On the other hand, if the amount of movement until the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are returned to the initial position is less than the predetermined amount, the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 in the execution order of FIG. , is changed to perform normal initial operation for the entire group A.

Similarly, when the special initial motion is performed for the second lower movable member 770, it is determined whether the amount of movement to the initial position is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount at the timing when the special initial motion is completed. Then, if the amount of movement until the second lower movable member 770 is returned to the initial position is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount, the initial operation table of FIG. The initial operation table changed by the special initial operation is used as it is. On the other hand, if the movement amount until the second lower movable member 770 is returned to the initial position is less than the predetermined amount, the initial operation of the fifth execution order in FIG. Change to the one that performs the normal initial operation.

In addition, when combined with the configuration of the first modification described above, the movable effect device will be in the normal detection state from the backup information for the movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state as the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation. It is also possible to calculate the amount of motion required until the normal initial motion is performed, and set whether or not to perform the normal initial motion according to the calculation result. In the first modification, at least the information of the initial motion and the operating state of the movable effect device in the initial motion can be stored, but it is assumed that the motion state of the movable effect device other than the initial motion can also be stored, and the movable effect device is normally used at all times. It may be possible to calculate the amount of movement required to reach the detection state.

[Initial operation processing]
When combined with the first modified example in this manner, the initial operation process shown in FIG. 157 is performed in place of the initial operation process shown in FIG. The processing of steps C121 to C125 is the same as in the first modification. In addition, in this initial operation process, if the state of all the detection sensors is not the normal detection state (step C104; N), after setting an initial operation table for performing a special initial operation according to the detection state (step C106), normal Perform processing to set whether to perform initial operation.

In this process, first, the amount of movement from the backup information to the initial position is calculated for the movable effect device that performs the special initial action (step C135). In addition, when a plurality of movable effect devices are not at the initial position, the calculation is performed for each movable effect device. That is, the production control device 300 serves as calculation means for calculating the amount of movement required for the movable production device to enter the normal detection state based on the information stored in the storage means.

Next, it is determined whether or not the amount of movement up to the initial position is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount (step C136).
). If the amount of movement up to the initial position is equal to or larger than the predetermined amount (step C136; Y), the process proceeds to step C107. In this case, there is a sufficient amount of movement in the returning motion, and the motion of the movable effect device can be confirmed by this returning motion, so further initial motion of the movable effect device is omitted.

Further, if the amount of movement up to the initial position is not equal to or greater than the predetermined amount (step C136; N),
That is, if the amount of movement of at least one movable effect device to the initial position is not equal to or greater than the predetermined amount, the table is changed to an initial action table in which normal initial actions are also performed for the movable effect devices whose movement amount is less than the predetermined amount (step C137), Move to step C107. In this case, there is a movable effect device for which the amount of movement in the return motion is insufficient, and the initial motion of the movable effect device is set to be performed again.

For example, when the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770 are not at the initial positions, the initial operation table of FIG. 146(b) is set in the process of step C106. . Then, the amount of movement required to return to the initial position calculated for each is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount for the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930, and for the second lower movable member 770 If less than the predetermined amount, step C1
In the processing of 37, the initial operation table is changed to the initial operation table in which the fifth initial operation in the execution order of FIG.

If the backup information is not valid, the amount of movement becomes unknown. Also, the normal initial operation is performed after the return operation. Also, in FIGS. 155, 156 and 157, the processing from steps C110 to C112 in FIG. 136 is omitted, but it may be performed in the same manner as in FIG.

Based on the above, based on the establishment of the starting condition, a game is executed in which the identification information is variably displayed,
In a gaming machine that generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, a movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 84
8, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910
, third central movable production member 920, fourth central movable production member 930), and position detection means capable of detecting the position of the movable production device (first to seventh detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 8
58, 889, 897) and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device, and the effect control means is configured to perform the initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on. When the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation indicates a predetermined normal detection state, the normal initial operation is performed as the initial operation, and the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is normal. If it is not in the detection state, the movable effect device is operated until it reaches the normal detection state, and if the amount of motion required to reach the normal detection state is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, the motion is taken as the initial motion and the movable effect. When the device does not perform the normal initial motion and the amount of motion required to reach the normal detection state is less than a predetermined amount, the movable effect device performs the normal initial motion after the end of the motion. becomes. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, a plurality of movable effect devices are provided, position detection means is provided for each of the movable effect devices, and the effect control means controls the movable effect devices whose detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is in a normal detection state. performs a normal initial action as an initial action, and for a movable effect device whose detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial action is not in the normal detection state, operates the movable effect device until it reaches the normal detection state, and the normal detection If the amount of motion required to reach the state is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, the motion is regarded as the initial motion of the movable effect device, and the normal initial motion is not performed for the movable effect device, and the normal detection state is reached. When the required amount of motion is less than the predetermined amount, the movable effect device performs the normal initial motion after the end of the motion. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, the effect control means is a storage means (RAM322, F
eRAM 323), the operation state of the movable effect device can be stored in the storage means, and when the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is not the normal detection state, the movable effect device can be moved based on the information stored in the storage means. Calculation means (production control device 300) for calculating the amount of movement required for the production device to enter the normal detection state is provided, and when the amount of movement calculated by the calculation means is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, the normal detection state is entered. If the movable effect device is operated until the normal detection state is reached, the normal initial motion is not performed for the movable effect device, and if the amount of motion calculated by the calculation means is less than the predetermined amount, the normal detection state is reached. After operating the movable effect device, the normal initial motion is performed. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

[Third modification]
Next, a description will be given of a third modification of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. I will explain the part. The game machine of this modified example performs an initial operation based on receiving control information from the game control means.

[Single-shot command processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, instead of the one-shot command processing shown in FIG. 122, the one-shot command processing shown in FIG. 158 is performed. In this single command processing, when it is determined that MODE corresponds to the model specifying command (step C261; Y), model setting processing (step C262) is performed to rewrite the internal information with the model information corresponding to the command. After that, the initial operation flag is set (step C141), the power-on flag is cleared (step C1
42), the single-shot command processing is terminated. The model specification command is a command that is always first transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 when the game machine is powered on.
It constitutes control information at the time of power-on transmitted from the game control device 100 based on power-on.

In addition, in the game machine of this modification, the initial operation flag is set in the process (step C7) of saving the initial value at the time of power-on in the area to be initialized by the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the game machine. is set here only. Therefore, the initial operation is performed only when the model designation command is received. Moreover, when the production|presentation control apparatus 300 cannot receive a model designation|designated command, an initial operation|movement will not be performed without an initial operation|movement being set in initial operation processing. Furthermore, in the gaming machine of this modification, the initial operation flag is saved in the area to be initialized by the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the gaming machine (step C7). A power-on flag is set to indicate that power has been turned on.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Also, instead of the received command analysis processing shown in FIG. 121, the received command analysis processing shown in FIG. 159 is performed. In this received command analysis process, the return operation process (step C150) is performed when a correct command is received.

[Return operation processing]
FIG. 160 shows return operation processing (step C150) in the received command analysis processing described above.
)showed that. In this return operation process, first, it is determined whether there is a power-on flag (step C151), and if there is no power-on flag (step C151; N), the return operation process is terminated. If there is a power-on flag (step C151; Y), clear the power-on flag (step C152), acquire the state of the detection sensor (step C153),
It is determined whether or not all the detection sensors are in the normal detection state (step C154). Then, if all the detection sensors are in the normal detection state (step C154; Y), the return operation process is terminated. Moreover, if all the detection sensors are not in the normal detection state (step C
154; N) sets a special initial action (return action) of the movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state (step C155), and ends the return action process.

As described above, the power-on flag is a flag that is set based on the power-on of the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the game machine, and the effect control device 300 is the first game control device 10
It is cleared when a model designation command received from 0 is received. Also, when a model specifying command is received, an initial operation flag is set and the initial operation of the movable effect device is performed.

However, if the effect control device 300 fails to take the model designation command for some reason, the initial operation flag is not set and the power-on flag remains set. In such a situation, when a command other than the model designation command is received, a return operation is performed to return the movable effect device that is not in the initial position to the initial position. As a result, when the model specifying command is not received when the power is turned on, the initial operation is omitted and only the return operation is performed, so that the execution of the initial operation does not delay the time when the game can be started normally. It is possible to prevent the movable performance device from being in an abnormal position and affecting the game by performing the return operation.

Although all commands other than the model designation command are used as triggers for the return operation, they may be limited to specific commands and can be set arbitrarily. For example, return operation processing (step C150
) may be performed. Predetermined control information related to the special figure variation display game includes variation commands and symbol commands that are commands transmitted at the start of the special figure variation display game.

By performing the return operation at the start of the special figure variation display game in this way, it is possible to prevent the execution of the special figure variation display game from being affected by the movable effect device being in an abnormal position.
That is, when the production control device 300 cannot receive the model designation command and the initial action is not performed, and the movable production device is not in the initial position and the special figure fluctuation display game is started, the movable The effect device can be returned to the initial position so as not to affect the execution of the special figure variation display game.

In addition, as the predetermined control information related to the special figure variation display game, a pattern stop command, a command related to the increase and decrease of the number of reservations, a command related to the result of the reservation look-ahead process, a big hit system command, etc. can be arbitrarily selected. . Further, when only the return operation is performed without performing the initial operation, the initial operation may be performed based on the customer waiting state. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform the initial operation without affecting the execution of the special figure variation display game.

In addition, when the production control device 300 cannot receive the model designation command and the initial operation is not performed and the movable production device is not at the initial position, when the command related to the special figure fluctuation display game is received, In the special figure variation display game, the movable effect device or all the movable effect devices may not be operated. In this case, when it can be grasped that the special figure variation display game has ended, the return operation is performed to return to the initial position, and the operation of the movable effect device may be enabled from the next special figure variation display game. Grasping that the special figure variation display game has ended is, for example, when a symbol stop command for the special figure variation display game is received, or when a command related to the start of the next special figure variation display game is received. .

Based on the above, based on the establishment of the starting condition, a game is executed in which the identification information is variably displayed,
A game control means (game control device 100) for comprehensively controlling a game in a game machine that generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result; , a movable production device (first lower movable members 740, 741, second
Lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 8
60, first central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910, third central movable effect member 920, fourth central movable effect member 930), and position detection means capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device (second 1st to 7th detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897
), and a production control means (production control device 300) that controls the operation of the movable production device based on control information from the game control means, and the production control means is transmitted from the game control means based on power-on. The initial operation of the movable effect device is performed based on the control information when the power is turned on, and when the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is a predetermined normal detection state, the initial operation A normal initial operation is performed, and when the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is not a normal detection state, a special initial operation is performed by omitting a part of the normal initial operation instead of the normal initial operation as the initial operation. is possible. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, when the performance control means does not receive the control information at the time of power-on transmitted from the game control means based on the power-on, the initial operation of the movable performance device is not performed. Therefore, by not performing the initial action when the start timing of the initial action is missed, the time until the game can be started can be shortened.

In addition, the effect control means, when receiving the predetermined control information regarding the game from the game control means, performs the operation of returning the movable effect device to the initial position. Therefore, when the game is started with the initial action omitted, the movable effect device that is not in the normal position can be returned to the initial position.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the movable accessory device can operate in a wider range of motion than the range of motion in the game.

As shown in FIG. 161, the second lower movable member 770 moves from the initial position shown in FIG. 161(a) to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 161(b) during game production. In the production, it rotates in the range from Fig. 161(a) to Fig. 161(b).

In the gaming machine of this modified example, the second lower movable member 770 moves from the state of FIG. 161(b) to the state of FIG.
61(c), and the actual rotatable range of the second lower movable member 770 is the range from FIG. 161(a) to FIG. 161(c). That is, the motion range in the game presentation is narrower than the operable range. In addition, Fig. 161
The range from (b) to (c) is not rotatable simply because there is play in the structure, but is rotatable by the effect control device 300 controlling the motor 734 to operate. Range. In this example, reaching the maximum operating position means that the second light shielding plate 773
can be detected by retracting from the detection portion of the second detection sensor 782 and changing the detection state from OFF to ON.

In the normal initial operation of the second lower movable member 770, from the initial position shown in FIG.
After operating to the maximum operating position shown in FIG. 161(c), the operation of returning to the initial position shown in FIG. 161(a) is performed. By doing so, it is possible to reliably guarantee the operation within the operation range in the game presentation by the initial operation.

Although the second lower movable member 770 is shown here, the motion range of the other movable effect devices is similarly set to be narrower than the operable range in the game effect, and the initial motion is made to operate up to the maximum motion position. You can do it. However, if the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 and the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are simultaneously operated to the maximum operating position, they interfere. sets the order of operations in the initial operation so that they do not interfere.

Further, when the special initial operation is performed when the detection result by the second detection sensor 782 before the start of the initial operation is not in the normal detection state (predetermined detection state), first, the operation is performed in the direction opposite to the direction of returning to the initial position. 161 (c) to the maximum operating position shown in FIG.
It may be returned to the initial position shown in a). Further, the operation up to the maximum operation position shown in FIG. 161(c) in the initial operation is performed only in the special initial operation, and in the case of the normal initial operation, it is performed in the range from FIG. 161(a) to (b). Also good.

Further, when the detection result by the second detection sensor 782 before the start of the initial operation is not in the normal detection state (predetermined detection state), a special initial operation for returning to the initial position is performed. Assuming that it takes time to return to the initial position due to some trouble, a measuring means is provided to measure the time to return to the initial position, and if the measurement result is longer than the predetermined time, the maximum operating position It may be configured to operate up to . The predetermined time referred to here is the time required to return from the maximum operating position to the initial position. After returning to the position, operate to the maximum operating position and check the operation. Also, in this case, when moving to the maximum operating position after returning to the initial position, the movable effect device may be operated slowly so as to reach the maximum operating position over a longer period of time than the predetermined time. good. It should be noted that it is also possible to apply the above-described first embodiment and other modified examples in which the range of motion in the presentation of the game matches the range of motion in the initial motion.

Based on the above, based on the establishment of the starting condition, a game is executed in which the identification information is variably displayed,
In a gaming machine that generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, a movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 84
8, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910
, third central movable production member 920, fourth central movable production member 930), and production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable production device, and the movable production device It is operable in a range wider than the operation range, and the effect control means is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on, and the operation range of the movable effect device in the initial operation is changed to the movable effect in the game effect. It means that it is possible to make it wider than the operating range of the production device. Therefore, by making the operation range of the movable effect device in the initial motion wider than the operation range of the movable effect device in the game effect, the operation in the motion range in the game effect can be reliably guaranteed.

In addition, position detection means capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device (first to seventh detection sensors 781,
782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897), and when the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is not in a predetermined detection state, the operation range is wider than the operation range of the movable effect device in the game effect. It means that the initial operation can be performed within the operation range. Therefore, when the movable effect device is in an abnormal state, it can be confirmed that the motion within the motion range of the game effect is possible, and the motion within the motion range of the game effect can be reliably guaranteed.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above-described embodiment, and may be other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, majang ball gaming machines, and the like. can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the modifications described above can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

10 game machine 41 display device 300 production control device (production control means)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed and then results are displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
a game control means for comprehensively controlling the game;
Production control means for controlling production related to the game ;
A movable production means operable under the control of the production control means;
A display means capable of displaying an effect related to the game under the control of the effect control means,
The game control means is
Along with the start of the variable display, sending a variable start command to the effect control means,
Along with the stop of the variable display, a variable stop command is transmitted to the effect control means,
Sending a fanfare command to the effect control means with the start of a state advantageous to the player,
The control information can be held even in a power failure state, and the game can be resumed based on the held control information when the power failure is restored,
The production control means is
Character information can be displayed on the display means as an effect related to the game ,
the character information can be displayed along a non-horizontal line in the first period;
the character information can be displayed along a horizontal line in the second period;
Further, the effect control means recovers from the power failure after a power failure occurs during execution of the game that becomes the special result, and the initial operation of the movable effect means started upon recovery of the power failure is the fluctuation stop command is completed between the reception of the fanfare command and the reception of the fanfare command, the rendering operation of the movable rendering means can be performed after the reception of the fanfare command,
After a power failure occurs during the execution of the game that does not result in the special result, the power failure is restored, and the initial operation of the movable effect means that is started with the recovery of the power failure is the same as that of the next game after the reception of the fluctuation stop command. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the game ends before a variation start command is received, the performance operation of the movable presentation means can be performed after the reception of the variation start command in the next game.

Images